Operations Manual: Bromma Telescopic Spreader

Operations manual
for
BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER
TYPE: EH170U
General assembly drawing No:1004850
Serial number: 7773
SWL: 41 tonne
Twinlift capacity:2 x 25 tonne
Customer: Gottwald
Date of shipping: 2005
_____________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 00 01 ENG
rev. .x
Warning!
This Operations manual is intended as a guide to the use and maintenance of
Bromma spreaders.
• READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS

PLACED INTO OPERATION!
• Bromma Conquip AB or it’s affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted

by law) accept no liability for loss or damage suffered as a result of the use
of this manual.
• If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.
• Refer at all time to the ”Safety precautions” under section 5!
• DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The
Safe Working Load is found on the nameplate that is permanently affixed
to the side frame of the spreader.
__________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
Table of contents
1 • INTRODUCTION
2 • SPREADER DATA SHEET
3 • TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER

Functional description
Design calculations
Safety features
In-plant testing
4 • TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE
5 • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6 • START-UP PROCEDURES
7 • MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Maintenance instructions
Periodic maintenance procedure
Lubrication instructions
Instructions for adjustment and repairs of major items
8 • SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE

Spare parts list by major groups
How to order spare parts and/or service
9 • HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10 • ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
11 • FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS

Hydraulic system
Electrical system
12 • APPENDICES
Units and conversion tables
Hydraulic symbols
Electrical symbols
13 • TTDS
_________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
1 • Introduction
BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of

telescopic container handling spreaders. A great number of BROMMA
spreaders are in service today in ports and terminals around the world.
A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are available,
and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent reliability,
ease of maintenance and repair.
This Operation Manual describes the many features of the

BROMMA spreader. It will guide you in:
• Maintenance.
• Repairs.
• Trouble-shooting.
• Service.
• Spare parts.
In the event You should need additional information or support, our

sales and/or technical staff will be pleased to assist you.

rev.
2 • Spreader - Datasheet
Type EH170U
Art.No 1004850
Container Range 20’- 40’
Capacity
Lifting capacity (evenly loaded) 41 tonne
Lifting capacity (10% gravity point off set) 41 tonne
Twinlift capacity 2 x 25 tonne
Twinlift capacity (10% gravity point off set) 2 x 20,5 tonne
Lifting lug capacity (gable end) 4 x 10 tonne
Lifting lug capacity (main beam) 4 x 10 tonne
Operating Movements
Telescoping 20’ to 40’ or 40’ to 20’ 30 s
Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90o 1,5 s
Electrical Equipment
Power voltage 400 V AC
Frequency 50 Hz
Control voltage 230 V AC
Control valve 24 V DC
Total power consumption 2x2,2 k + 1x3kW + 3+5,5 =15,9
Electrical protection IP 55
Hydraulic Equipment
Pump running Pressure 100 bar
Pump flow 2 x 14 l/min + 1x18 l/min
Tank capacity 1 x 70 l + 2 x 50 l
Normal running temperature (above ambient) 50°C
Filter type 10 µm
Filter
Pressure line 10 µm
Corrosion protection
Blast cleaning to SA 2 ½ - ISO 8501:1
Interzinc 72 50 µm
Intercure 420 70 µm
Interfine 629 HS 40 µm
Interfine 629 HS 40 µm
Min. coating thickness, total 200 µm
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 02 01ENG
rev..1
3 • Technical description
Functional description
Bromma telescopic spreader EH5 (EH12 & EH170) are fabricated as all
welded, high quality steel, construction. Two pairs of telescopic beams slide in
the centre main frame construction. The telescopic beams are joined together
at the ends by end beams, which house the twistlocks, flipper arms and
hydraulic valves.
The spreader has an inbuilt under clearance of 185 mm. This enables
hatchcovers and containers with protrusions up to 185 mm to be handled. If
larger clearances are required then overweight extension legs need to be fitted.
The spreader is optionally fitted with one set of lifting lugs. Mostly, they are
placed at each corner of the gable end. In case the spreader is provided with
this device, it can be used for handling of badly damaged containers or non-
containerised cargo.
Use only approved slings and shackles.

Where the telescopic arms slide in the mainframe they are supported by a
number of low friction slides plates, one at each corner of the mainframe (total
4) and on the top and bottom at the end on each telescopic arm (total 8).
Sufficient clearance is provided between the slide plates and the structure to
allow the beams to flex, enabling distorted containers to be handled.
The spreader function (i.e. twistlocks, flippers, telescoping) is operated from the
driver’s controls in the crane cab.
TELESCOPIC SYSTEM
The telescoping system is driven by means of an electric motor and reduction
gearbox connected to an endless chain. This chain is titted with stacks of spring
washers that work as chock absorbers where the chain attaches to the tension
rods.. These tension rods are connected to the end beam. The springs allow for
changes in the length of the spreader up to plus or minus 7 mm . The springs
do not only act as shock absorbers; they also provide a floating possibility for
the twistlocks to handle distorted containers. This "floating" action also
eliminates the need for corner guide rollers.
In the event of a power failure the telescoping motion can be handcranked.

The positioning system works with proximity switches for positioning the
spreader in the 20', 30' and 40' positions. This system enables the positioning
of the twistlocks with an accuracy of plus or minus
3 mm (less than 1/8"). The drive motor incorporates an electric brake that is
spring applied and takes electrical power to release.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG.
rev. x
This brake not only controls the accuracy in stopping the expansion and
retraction but also prevents changes from occurring in the spreader length
during use.
TOWER
The main frame of the spreader is connected to the crane through a sliding
tower assembly. This enables the centre of gravity lifting point to be moved a
maximum of 1,2 meters toward each end of the spreader. This means that
unevenly loaded containers can be picked up horizontally, which is specially
important when loading or unloading in the guides in the ship´s cells. After
unlocking an unevenly loaded container, the sliding tower assembly
automatically returns to the central position
FLIPPERS
Flat gather guides, commonly called flippers, are fitted to each end beam of the
spreader. They are of strong construction and are driven by a powerful
hydraulic motor, which enables easy and fast location of the spreader onto the
containers. The flipper gather is 155 mm and has a gathering torque of
1200 Nm. The flipper arms are always under pressure and each arm has a
shock relief valve, which opens at a pre-set pressure of 45 bar above the
normal working pressure. As soon as the shock load ends the flipper returns to
the vertical position.
Each flipper is controlled by its own solenoid valve and shock relief valve. The
flippers work in pairs along the length of the spreader, individually at the gable
ends, or all together.
The speed of the flipper is approximately 180° in 6 seconds and is
controlled by an orifice plug in the pipe connection to the motor.
TWISTLOCK
Four twistlocks for single container spreader are located in the corners of the
spreader to engage and lift the container. A hydraulic cylinder rotates the
twistlock and two sensors indicate the position of the twistlock, Locked or
Unlocked.
A landing pin safety system is provided to assure that the spreader is properly
landed on the container before rotating the twistlocks.
A spring loaded landing pin near each twistlock is pushed up into the twistlock
housing when the spreader is landed on the container. When the spreader is
properly landed on a container, the landing pin will activate a proximity switch.
Only when all the corners of the spreader are landed, can the twistlocks be
turned. At the same time, the blockading key is moved high enough so the
blockading stop on the twistlock lever arm passes underneath it. If the
spreader is not properly landed the proximity switch will not be activated and
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev. x
the blockading key will get in the way of the blocking stop. This will stop the
twistlocks from turning.
CENTER TWISTLOCKS (EH 170U)

The EH 170 is equipped with center twistlocks to be able to handle two 20 foot
containers at the same time. These center twistlocks are placed in housings on
the main frame. The twistlock boxes can be tilted to “down” position by four
hydraulic cylinders. (one per twistlock box). The center twistlocks operate the
same way as the end beam twistlocks.
SIGNAL LIGHT
Near each end of the spreader mainframe there is a set of three signals light,
one green, one red, one white, which can be clearly seen from the crane cabin.
The green and red lights indicate if corresponding twistlocks are unlocked or
locked respectively. The white light indicates when the spreader is properly
"landed", and the twistlocks are correctly engaged in the container corner
castings.
In twinlift spreaders (EH170U), when using the twinlift function, the left side
signal lamps are valid for the left side container and the right side lamps are for
the right side container.
HYDRAULIC UNITS
The hydraulic units are protected inside each end beam. The unit consists of a
built-in tank, variable displacement piston pump, motor valves and filter. The
filter cap is fitted with a pressure relief valve plus or minus 0,14 bar to allow
expansion and contraction of air inside the tank.
The hydraulic components used are designed to work at over 200 bar but
normal working pressure is 100 bar. The hydraulic valves are solenoid
operated and can be tested by hand operating.
The EH170U has a third hydraulic unit placed in the main beam. This unit
provides the four cylinders for center twistlock housings up-down and the four
cylinders for lock-unlock in the central twistlocks with power.
MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET

The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock absorbers
and is well protected being placed on the tower. Relays, transformers, circuit
breakers, timers, hour counters and sockets are mounted in this cabinet. The
PLC is also placed on the tower. A junction box including motor protectors is
placed inside the main frame.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev. x
• Design calculations
The spreader structure is designed according to DIN15018 and to the
following loading group which represents a container handling crane.
• HOISTING GROUP H2
• LOADING GROUP B4
LIFTING CASES
The following lifting cases are considered:
1. Most frequent load case

A symmetrically loaded container of 41 tonne. The permissible stress is
determined by analysis of direct loading and fatigue conditions. Depending
on intensity of use the structure is suitable for:
2 X 106 lifting cycles

"H” load case is determining.
2. Exceptional load cases

Permissible stresses are determined by analysis of direct loading only.
a) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in

the longitudinal direction.
"H.Z" load case is determining.
b) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in

the longitudinal and lateral direction.
"H.S" load case is determining

rev. x
Safety features
The following safety features are normally included in the crane:
1. The spreader should only be hoisted/lowered when all four twistlocks are
fully locked/unlocked.
2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is

Properly "landed" on a container. This being when all four landing switches
are actuated.
3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to

ensure the spreader is properly "landed" and not bouncing. This is in the
form of a timer whom is adjustable, but normally set to between 1 and 2
seconds.
4. During hoisting the four blockading pins move to the "down" position.
This prevents electrically the twistlocks from moving.
NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can
be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running
the twistlock.
5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins

are in the "down" position and the twistlocks are unlocked.
Individual switches indicate twistlocks locked, twistlocks unlocked and
blockading pins "up".
The following safety features are fitted on the spreader:
6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/

unlocking unless the blockading pin is "up" position.
__________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
In-plant testing
STRUCTURAL
Each spreader is fully proof tested in the factory to a minimum of 50%
overload prior to delivery. The proof test loading report enclosed illustrates the
loads applied to the spreader.
All lifting lugs are also proof tested in the factory.
The testing is witnessed and certified by a third part inspection official.
All spreader twistlocks are individually proof tested, stamped and certified to a
loading of 37 tonne.
FUNCTIONAL
Each spreader is run in the factory prior to delivery being controlled by a
specially designed simulator.
__________________________________________________________________________________
rev. x
4 • Testing records and certificates
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
5 • Safety precautions
Warnings
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT

INTO OPERATION.
The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the
correct use of the spreader.
Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for
any purposes outside what is described in the manual.
DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe
Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the
side frame of the spreader.
Safety precautions
1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized

personnel.
2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is
designed.
3. DO NOT change system settings and functions.
4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.
5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.
6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving
beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters.
7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is

on.
8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by

qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper
pressure adjustment.
9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It

could cause personnel injury or property damage.
1 of 2 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 01 ENG

rev.. x
10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components
11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily.
12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the
spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by
personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and
movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur
13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the
spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts.
14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation.
15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5°).
16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or

adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar.
17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.
18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden

or empty, by hand or by tagline.
19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many
prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could
cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container
and an obstruction (such as a building or another container).
20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the
spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates.
21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the

movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed
on crane-mounted spreader.
22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it
leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the
Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom.
23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled,
make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection
and earth cable.

rev.. x
WARNING!
Because this spreader is equipped with double-coil flipper

arm valves but connected as a single coil valve function,
the following may occur:
If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves

disappears (intentionally or accidentally), the FLIPPER
ARMS move upwards to their starting position.
If EMERGENCY STOP is used or if the power supply to
the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is cut of in
some other way, the flipper arms stop immediately. The
flipper arms start moving again when the power supply to
the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is restored.
It is essential to inform the personnel who work close to
the spreader about this.
_____________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 02d ENG.
rev.
CAUTION!
”MOTIONS CAN AUTOMATICALLY RE-START WHEN THE
EMERGENCY SPREADER STOP IS RE-SET!”
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 03 ENG.

rev.
6 • Start - Up procedure
ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476)
1 Check spreader and tower for damage.
2 Suspend the tower from a suitable forklift or crane (tower weight 1,4 t)
using
the main lifting pin (pos 1).
3 Remove the protective material from the robalon pads on tower (pos 2).
Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).
Remove the (2) lifting lugs from main frame of the spreader at the
assembly end
(pos 3).
5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening

hydraulic hoses on the motor.
NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury!
6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4).
7 Remove lamp assembly by taking out the quick release fastening from
the four pins and lay the lamp assembly in the main frame.
8 Release the gravity point chain, by removing the two screws and the
locking device from adjuster.
9 You are now able to slide the tower into the main frame close to the
centre.
Note the direction of assembly. Arrows are painted on the tower and
frame.
10 Now replace the lamp assembly, rubber covers and lifting lugs. If the
flipper is rise at this time, care should be taken as it is liable to fall, now
that the motor is empty.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG
rev.
11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).
It is now possible to install the chain, complete with the anchor block
fitted.
The chain goes, under the first sprocket, over the centre one and under
the third.
To assist with the chain installation, pull the brake release lever, towards
the back of the motor. It is then possible to turn the motor, using the
handle supplied.
12 Replace the chain back into it's fixing point and tighten the adjusting
screws, until the chain is tight (allow a sag of about 30 mm and place the
tower in middle position) and replace the locking device. Grease the chain.
13 Replace sprocket cover.
14 Pass the main plug up through the tower and fix conduit pipes with screws
supplied.
15 Place the cable into the top support clamp.
16 Connect the tower motor. The connections are marked u1 and w1 to give
correct position.
NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage!
17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties.
18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7).
19 Check all bolts are tight and the spreader is clear of all discarded material
and tools. Take care that nothing had fallen into the chain.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING
The tower function is to level/unlevel loaded containers. Any other use of the
tower is an abuse of the equipment and could result in serious damage.
When the spreader is locked onto a container, it is possible to move the tower
in any direction. The tower will stay where it is placed. The return to the middle
position is done by the crane driver. When he has driven the tower to yellow or
blue, it goes always to the middle position.
To test the newly assembled unit, place the blockading pin clamps onto the
spreader and lock the twistlocks. With the spreader on the ground, commence
to travel the tower towards one end of the spreader. Now hold a piece of
metal, i.e. spanner or screwdriver, in front of the stop switch, for the end that
the tower is travelling. The tower should now stop.
Try the other direction. If both of the limits work, travel the tower to both ends
of the spreader, to confirm the limits work on the detection bar. When at each
end, unlock the twistlocks and release a clamp, to confirm the tower returns to
it's centre position. If any of these functions fail, please seek advice.
WARNING!
Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur!
Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious
injury may occur!
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
Start - Up the spreader
1. Before any connection to container crane, place the main frame of the
spreader on trestles or similar about 0,7 m height and in such a way that the
flipper arms can be lowered.
2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage.
3. Connect the main current and control supply to the spreader. Connect the 24
pin plug to the service panel.
4. Start the electric motor of the hydraulic units by turning the ”pump on” switch on
service panel.
5. For testing of the twistlocks all 4 blockading pins should be in ”up” position. This
is achieved by using a blockading pin clamp. In the ”down” position the
blockading pins electrically and mechanically block all twistlock rotation.
6. Test all functions of the spreader using the push buttons and switches on the
service panel.
a) When ”pump on” switch is on, both electric motors should be running in
gable ends.
b) Operate the push buttons to put the spreader in the different length positions.
As an additional length, check that the twistlock centre length is marked on
the plate positioned on side of the main beam.
c) Check that the flippers works in pairs along the length of the spreader,
individually at the gable ends, or all together by pressing the appropriate
buttons.
d) Check that when clamps are fitted to the blockading pins and all pins are up,
this will be indicated by the white lights on the spreader.
e) Check that the twistlocks lock/unlock and that the light indicators on the top
of the spreader main frame indicate red when locked and green when
unlocked.
7. Check that the pump operating pressure is 100 bar.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
8. Check each end hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil leaks.
9. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers and twistlocks can be
manually operated if required.This is achieved by pushing the end of the
solenoid with a small screwdriver. As power is generally always on the
solenoid, the plug connection has to be disconnected first.
10. Service and lubrication should be carried out in accordance with the
lubrication manual.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
rev.
7 • Maintenance procedures
Maintenance Instructions
IMPORTANT!
When the spreader is disconnected from the crane the heating function
(if fitted) must always be connected and energised.
Pos. 1
TWISTLOCK (drg no 22808)
All twistlock are to be greased through the greasecups 4 per spreader.
Pos. 2
TWISTLOCK CYLINDER & BEARING HOUSING IN TOWER (drg no 22808)
Piston rod ends are to be greased. 8 per spreader. Bearing housing in tower.
2 per spreader.
Pos. 3
HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22809)
Oil is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours.
Pos. 4
OIL FILTER (drg no 22809)
Filter is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours of
operation or when the indicator is red.
Pos. 5
LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22808)
(If the spreader/headblock is equipped with lifting shafts).
ACTION! To be greased.
Pos. 6
GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22810)
The robalon glide plates are to be replaced when the thickness is down to
17 mm.
ACTION! To be checked.

rev.3
Pos. 7
GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22808)
Shafts are to greased.
Pos. 8
TELESCOPIC GEARBOX (drg no 22808 & 22809)
Oil level is to be checked through dismantled oil level plug. Bearings at the
gearbox and the pedestal are to be greased through greasecups.
Pos. 9
ALL ROLLER CHAINS AND TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22808)
Roller chains and tension wheel are to be checked from abrasion and
greased.
Pos. 10
SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22810)
Vibration proof glow lamp.
ACTION! To be checked.
Pos. 11
TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22808)
To be greased as follows:
1. In 20'- position, through greasenipple underneath the mainframe ca

50g/week.
2. In fully expanded position, with a brush on the sliding area under the
telescopic beams ca 100g/ at interval min.1000 hour. The amount of
grease and service interval depends on spreader use and environmental
circumstances which vary from place to place.
Pos. 12
ELECTRICAL MOTORS (Only for EH5)
Adjust brakes as per attached instructions.

rev.3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER
After 50 and 250 hours

1. Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
2. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved more than ± 25 mm

in vertical direction.
Nut
EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS
1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating

mechanism and ensure that all parts are
properly tightened down. Check that the
locking pin can be moved easily and that it
indicates the correct position
(see 'Adjusting the locking pin').
2. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight. Twistlock pin
3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct.
4. Carefully inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections. Defective
hydraulic hoses and connections may cause personal injury when jets of
liquid escape under high pressure.
5. Leaking hose connections and defective hoses should be rectified

immediately.
EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS

Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical

supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent
personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch
or by disconnecting the power cable.
If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on
or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.

rev. x
TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE
Every 3000 working hours (100,000 containers handled2 or once annually3)
1. Dismantle all four twistlocks (eight on twin-lift- Nut

spreaders).
2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which

Spherical
necessitate their replacement. washer
3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults)

in the threads of the twistlock pins or 'heads'.
Use penetrating fluid to detect fissures.
Twistlock
4. Replace the twistlock pin if cracks are detected. pin
5. Clean all parts.
6. Lubricate the parts.
7. Reassemble the twistlocks.
Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other

year5)
The twistlock pins and the spherical washers6 shall be replaced.
NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions
for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.
--------------------------
2
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
3
If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter
4
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
5
If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter
6
Only for floating twistlocks

rev. x
PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR
OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER
REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP
When ordering a new hydraulic pump always state the direction of rotation as
marked on the old pump housing.
To replace the hydraulic pump (free-standing pump unit):

1.Turn off the electrical supply using the main switch.
2. Disconnect the inlet , outlet hoses and drainhoses from the pump.
3. Reconnect the inlet and outlet hoses once the pump has been fitted.
4. Reconnect the drain hose to the pump.
5. See drawing no.45316 for setting the pump flow and pressure.
NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts
to run out of the drain hose.
SHOCK RELIEF VALVES, general
These are cross over relief valves which relieves excess hydraulic pressure
caused by external forces on the flipper arms or the telescopic system. The
rising hydraulic pressure acts against the spring to open the flow path to the
other port.
All leakage’s through these valves at the normal operating pressure of the
pump (lower setting than the pump's operating pressure) cause a substantial
increase in the temperature of the hydraulic oil. Leaks of this type are often
indicated by a hissing sound coming from the relief valve.
Possible causes are:

* Slides jamming due to poor hydraulic oil
* Defective seals
* Incorrect pressure setting

rev. x
Locking
ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN screws
(Drawing no. 38073)
1. Run the spreader to the maximum
position (40 foot).
Adjusting
2. Disconnect the power. nut
3. Remove the locking screws from
the adjuster nut.
4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides
with a torque wrench to 50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.)
alternately one turn at a time . It is important Cotter pin
to adjust both sides equally. If not done
properly this could cause future problems
in operation and reduce the life of the chain. Chain lock
5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .
REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN

If the chain should break and jump over the chain wheel, repair as follows:
1. Disconnect the electrical supply in the spreader control cabinet by turning

off the main switch.
2. Place the telescopic beams in the approximate position for a 30 foot

container using a fork lift truck or similar.
3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.
4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by pulling out the
cotter pin.
5. Remove the chain.
6. Install a new chain or insert a joining link and reinstall the chain and the
adjusting nut.
7. Perform the steps described above (Adjusting the telescopic chain).
8. Connect the power supply and make a fine adjustment as per the
instructions in 'Setting the spreader length'.
9. Check the distance between the twistlocks as per the instructions in

Spreader lengths with different twistlocks'.
10. Lubricate the chain according to drawing 22808, Lubrication points.

rev. x
REPLACING ROBALON PLATES
Robalon plate in main frame
1. Extend the spreader to at least the 30 foot position.
2. Remove the locking plate and replace the Robalon plate.
Telescopic beam lower plates

1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic

valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible through the aperture in the
lower flange of the main beam. Replace the plates.
Telescopic beam upper plates

1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic

valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible.
4. Replace the plates.
DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT

If the telescopic beams require checking.
1. Start by removing all the Robalon plates from the ends of telescopic
beams. Leave the plates on the main frame in place.
2. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from the end units.
Seal all hydraulic hoses correctly.
3. Remove the stud from the drawbar connection in the end beam.
4. Take the weight off the end unit using a fork lift truck and extend the unit to
the 40 foot position.

rev. x
5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral
movement.
6. Extract the beams from the main frame and inspect them as required.
6. Reassemble the beams and the end units in the reverse order to that in
the instructions above.
FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS)
1. Remove the outlet plug to alter flipper arm speed.
NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is
correctly positioned.
2. Removing and installing bearings
a) Remove the flipper arms
b) Remove the key
c) Drift out the shaft. Once the shaft has been removed the bearing will be
pushed out by the middle key.
d) Drift out the second bearing.
e) Install the parts in the reverse order to dismantle except for that both
bearings have to be drifted into position using a pipe of a suitable bore.

rev. x
ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH
Sensors:
a) Adjust the centre to centre distance Sensor
between twistlocks for each position
by moving the sensors.
b) For 30' check the centre to centre

distance between twistlock both when
extending and retracing the spreader.
The accurate distances between the
twistlocks are shown in ”Spreader
length with different twistlocks”. Sensor
plate
SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS

BROMMA ISO Twistlock
20' 30' 40'
Floating: 5852 8918 11984
ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN
a) Attach blockading pin clamps

at three of the corners.
b) At the fourth corner, press the

pin upwards.
c) When the lower part of the pin Landing

switch
is 6 - 7 mm from the bottom plate
of the corner, the lamp indicating
"spreader landed", shall go on.
d) If the distance is not correct, Landing pin

adjust the landing switch and
do the test again.

rev. x
e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners.
Twistlock
DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN nut
M6 nut
1. Dismout the twistlock cylinder as
M6 screw
described on the next page.
2. Remove the M6 screw and nut
from the top of the twistlock.
3. Grab hold of twistlock head.
4. Slack off the twistlock nut.
5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide Guide
block. neck
6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.
Twistlock
MOUNTING housing
1. Perform the steps above in the Twistlock
reverse order. head
2. Carry out the adjustment below
3. before mounting the M6 screw and nut.
4. Lubricate according to instructions on drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
Distance between top of twistlock head

and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm
Checking the Float

1. Grab hold of the twistlock head.
2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners.
3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock
housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be
adjusted /lowered.
4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the
twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner. Twistlock nut
5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it
moves a lot, adjust it higher. Spherical
6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be washer
adjusted down.
Adjusting Key
1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut.
The distance between the top of twistlock head and the Twistlock pin
bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
3. Recheck the float of the twistlock.
4. Reinstall the M6 screw.
Twistlock
8 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB
head
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Removing the Twistlock Cylinder
1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected
and the oil pressure is relieved from the
system. Split pin
2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder.
3. To avoid oil leakage, thread a plastic bag Spacer
over the end of the hoses and secure
ring
them with straps.
4. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer
rings and the cylinder.
Installing the Twistlock Cylinder

1. Perform the steps above in the reverse Cylinder
order.
2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm
(70 ft-lbs) torque.
3. De-aerate the system by running the
cylinder several times.
Removing Sensors
1. Unscrew the cable connection from
the sensor.
2. Loosen the two screws on the switch
attachment. Signal
3. Remove the sensor. cable
Sensor connection
Installing Sensors
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order, using blue Loctite to the cable
connection.
2. The distance between sensor face and
flag is approximately 5-6 mm. Check
the sensor by grabbing the twistlock
head and moving it around in different
positions. If the signal is lost, adjust the
sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the
flag does not come in contact with
the sensor.

rev. x
Checking the tower motor brake
1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the crank from its stowed position in the tower.
3. Install the crank at the rear end of the
tower motor.
4. Place a torque wrench in the ½” socket on the crank
5. Adjust the torque to 65 Nm.
6. If the torque wrench releases as the 65 Nm torque is
reached, the brake adjustment is OK. If it does not release and
the motorshaft rotates, the brake must be adjusted.
See Inspection and maintenance of BGM8 Tower motor
at the end of this section.
Tower Crank
motor
75 Nm
Torque
wrench

rev. x
Bromma Manual
Important tightening torques EH5/EH170

Tower and
main frame
434Nm
222Nm
434Nm
434Nm
434Nm
End beam
91Nm 6.5 Nm
52Nm
Telescopic motor Telescopic motor

EH5 / EH170 EH5U / EH170U
434Nm
52Nm
434Nm
0-1- Month. 03 rev.00 Bromma Conquip

Bromma Manual
Limit switch box

EH5 / EH170
91Nm
Twistlock Twistlock
EH5 / EH170 EH5U / EH170U
100 Nm
95 Nm
91Nm
Flipper motor and gearbox

250Nm
after 200
test
cycles 385Nm
91Nm
103Nm
after 200
test cycles
Bromma Conquip 0-2- Month. 03 rev.00

H:\DWG\A3\A38\38073A.dwg
1 of 2
Inspection and maintenance periods 8
8 Inspection and Maintenance
•
•
•
•
8.1 Inspection and maintenance periods

Equ ipm ent/com po nen ts Frequency What to do ?
Inspecting the brake:
• Mea sure and set working air gap
BMG4 =Telescopic Motor Every Year • brake disc, lining
• P ressure plate
BMG8 = Tower Motor Every third month • C arrier / gearing
• P ressure rings
• E xtract the ab raded ma tter

• Inspect the switch elemen ts and
repla ce if necessary (e.g . in case o f
burn-out)
1
8 Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8
8.6 Inspection and maintenance of brake

BMG4 = Telescopic Motor
BMG8 = Tower Motor 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
22
21
e
10 20
c 19
b
a 18
17
16
15
14
11 12 13
2
Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8 , setting the working air gap
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
2. Remove the following:
– If fitted, forced- cooling fan for
motor and brake maintenance.
– F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ).
3. Pu sh the rubber sealing co llar (5) aside.
– R elease the clip to do this, if necessary .
– E xtract the abr aded ma tter.
4. Measure the brake disc (7 ):
If the brak e d isc is:
– ≤ 9 mm on b rake motors up to size 100 .(BMG4)
– ≤ 10 mm on bra ke motor s up to size 1 12.(BMG8)
Fit a new brake disc (→ Section "Ch anging brake disc on BMG 4 and 8
3
Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8 8
Changing thebrake disk BMG 4 and 8

When fitting a ne w brake disc, in spect the other removed pa rts as well and fit new one s
if nece ss ary
1. Iso late the moto r and brake from the supply,, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
– If fitted, forced coolin g fan
– F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).

3. Rem ove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5 ) an d the ma nual brake release:
– S etting nuts ( 18), con ica l coil sp rings (1 7), studs (16), rele ase lever (1 5), dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscr ew hex nuts (1 0e ), ca refully pull off the brake co il body (1 2) (brake ca ble!) an d
take out the brak e spr ings (11).
5. Rem ove the dam ping plate (9 ), pres sur e pla te (8) and brake disc (7, 7b) an d cle an
the br ak e com ponents .
6. Fit a ne w brake d isc.
7. Re- install th e br ake comp onents.
– E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan and fan guard, se t the working air gap
(→ ”Inspe cting brake BMG 4 and 8, settin g the wor king air gap” , points 5
through 8)
8. With m anual brake r elease: Use se tting n uts to set the flo ating clear ance "s"
between the conical co il springs (pressed flat) an d the settin g nuts ( → following
illustration).
Brak e Floa ting clear ance s [mm]
BMG 4 and 8 2
Importan t: This flo ating clerance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu ara nteed.
9. Fit the r ubber sea ling colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note: • T he locka ble man ual brake r elea s e ( type HF) is a lready r elea s ed if a re sistan ce is
encountered whe n ope rating the gr ub scre w.
• T he se lf-reengaging manual b rake re lea s e (type HR) ca n be operated with normal
hand pressu re.
Imp ortant: In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the
manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance. A bracket
is provided for storing it on the outside of the motor.
4
Changing Springs
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional po wer -up.
– If fitted, fo rced -cooling fan ,
For motor and brake ma intenance .
– F lange cover or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Remove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5) an d the ma nual brake release:
– s etting nuts (18 ), conical coil sp rings (1 7), studs ( 16) , release le ver ( 15) , dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscrew he x nuts ( 10e ), pull o ff the co il body ( 12) .
– B y app rox. 50 mm (watch the bra ke ca ble!) .
5. Cha nge brake springs (11).
– P os ition the bra ke sp rings symme trically.
6. Re- install th e br ake components..
– E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan an d fan gu ard,
set the wor king air ga p (→ ”Ins pecting brake BMG 4 and 8 setting the
working air gap ” , points 5 th rough 8)
7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to s et floating c learance "s" between
the co nical coil springs (pressed fla t) an d the setting nuts ( → following illustration.)
Brak e Floa ting clear ance s [mm]
BMG 4 and 8 2
Importan t: This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu aranteed.
8. Fit the rubber sealing colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note Fit new settingnuts (18) an d hexag on nuts ( 10e ) if the re moval pr oced ure is r epeated!
5
kVA n
9 f Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8
i
P Hz
9.3 Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4-8
Workin g air gap
Work do ne Br aking torque se ttings
[mm]
Brak e Fo r until
Br aking Type an d n o. of Order n umber o f
type motor size main tenance
[10 6 J] min. 1) ma x. torque springs spr ings
[N m] Nor mal Red Norma l Red
0.25 0.6
135 150 8 135 151 6

40 6 -
BMG 4 100 260
75 6 -
112M
BMG 8 600 0.3 1.2 184 845 3 135 570 8
132S
1)
Please note when checking the air gap:
Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rice to deviation of ±0.1 after
a test run.
6
A ddres s lis t
C o n t a c t y o u r B R O M M A l o c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r S E W A ddres s es below.
G ermany
Headquarters B ruc hs al S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0
P roduc tion E rnst-B lickle-S traß e 42 F ax (0 72 51) 75-19 70
S ales D-76646 B ruchs al http://www.S E W-E UR ODR IV E .de
S ervic e P.O. B ox s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.de
P os tfach 3023 · D-76642 B ruchsal
P roduc tion G raben S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0
E rnst-B lickle-S traß e 1 F ax (0 72 51) 75-29 70
D-76676 G raben-Neudorf Telex 7 822 276
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 1220 · D-76671 G raben-Neudorf
A s s embly G arbs en S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30
S ervic e (near Hannover) Alte R icklinger S traß e 40-42 F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55
D-30823 G arbs en s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 110453 · D-30804 G arbs en
K irc hheim S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10
(near München) Domagks traß e 5 F ax (0 89) 90 95 52-50
D-85551 K irchheim s cm-kirchheim@ s ew-eurodrive.de
L angenfeld S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30
(near Düs s eldorf) S iemens s traß e 1 F ax (0 21 73) 85 07-55
D-40764 Langenfeld s cm-langenfeld@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Meerane S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0
(near Zwickau) Dänkritzer Weg 1 F ax (0 37 64) 76 06-30
D-08393 Meerane s cm-meerane@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Additional address es for s ervice in G ermany provided on reques t!
F ranc e
P roduc tion Haguenau S E W-US OC OME S AS Tel. 03 88 73 67 00
S ales 48-54, route de S oufflenheim F ax 03 88 73 66 00
S ervic e B . P. 185 http://www.us ocome.com
F -67506 Haguenau C edex s ew@ us ocome.com
A s s embly B ordeaux S E W-US OC OME S AS Tel. 05 57 26 39 00
S ales P arc d’a ctivité s de Magellan F ax 05 57 26 39 09
S ervic e 62, avenue de Magellan - B . P. 182
F -33607 P es s ac C edex
Lyon S E W-US OC OME S AS Tel. 04 72 15 37 00
P arc d’A f faires R oos evelt F ax 04 72 15 37 15
R ue J acques Tati
F -69120 Vaulx en Velin
P aris S E W-US OC OME S AS Tel. 01 64 42 40 80
Zone indus trielle F ax 01 64 42 40 88
2, rue Denis P apin
F -77390 Verneuil I’E t ang
Additional address es for s ervice in F rance provided on reques t!
A rgentina
A s s embly B uenos A ires S E W E UR ODR IV E AR G E NT INA S .A. Tel. (3327) 45 72 84
S ales C entro Indus trial G arin, Lote 35 F ax (3327) 45 72 21
S ervic e R uta P anamericana K m 37,5 s ewar@ s ew-eurodrive.com.ar
1619 G arin
A us tralia
A s s embly Melbourne S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D. Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00
S ales 27 B everage Drive F ax (03) 99 33 10 03
S ervic e Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
S ydney S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D. Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00
9, S leigh P lace, Wetherill P ark F ax (02) 97 25 99 05
New S outh Wales , 2164
A us tria
A s s embly Wien S E W-E UR ODR IV E G es .m.b.H. Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0
S ales R ichard-S traus s -S tras s e 24 F ax (01) 6 17 55 00-30
S ervic e A-1230 Wien s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.at
7
Address list
Belgium
Assembly Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax (010) 2313 36
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Brazil
Production Sao Paulo SEW DO BRASIL Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33
Sales Motores-Redutores Ltda. Fax (011) 64 80 33 28
Service Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208 sew@sew.com.br
CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GMBH Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax (92) 9 54 93 45
BG-1606 Sofia bever@mbox.infotel.bg
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax (905) 7 91-29 99
Service Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1 www.sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35
7188 Honeyman Street Fax (604) 946-2513
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24
2555 Rue Leger Street Fax (514) 3 67-36 77
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63
Sales Chile Motores-Reductores LTDA. Fax (02) 6 23 81 79
Service Panamericana Norte No 9261
Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura
RCH-Santiago de Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12
Assembly No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Fax (022) 25 32 26 11
Sales Tianjin 300457
Service
Colombia
Assembly Bogotá SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. (0571) 5 47 50 50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax (0571) 5 47 50 44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B sewcol@andinet.com
Santafé de Bogotá
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 14 61 31 58
Service PIT Erdödy 4 II Fax +385 14 61 31 58
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Czech Republic
Sales Praha SEW-EURODRIVE S.R.O. Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36
Business Centrum Praha Fax 02/20 12 12 37
Luná 591 sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
16000 Praha 6
Denmark
Assembly Kopenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. 4395 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100 Fax 4395 8509
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. 6 59 32 30
Paldiski mnt.125 Fax 6 59 32 31
EE 0006 Tallin
8
Address list
Finland
Assembly Lahti SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. (3) 589 300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax (3) 780 6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. 19 24 89 38 55
Sales Beckbridge Industrial Estate Fax 19 24 89 37 02
Service P.O. Box No.1
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR
Greece
Sales Athen Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. 14 22 51 34
Service 12, Mavromichali Street Fax 14 22 51 59
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus Boznos@otenet.gr
Hong Kong
Assembly Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54
Sales Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax 2-7 95-91 29
Service Hong Leong Industrial Complex sew@sewhk.com
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06 58
Service H-1037 Budapest Fax +36 1 437 06 50
Kunigunda u. 18
India
Assembly Baroda SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd. Tel. 0 265-83 10 86
Sales Plot No. 4, Gidc Fax 0 265-83 10 87
Service Por Ramangamdi · Baroda - 391 243 sew.baroda@gecsl.com
Gujarat
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax (01) 8 30 64 58
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Italy
Assembly Milano SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. (02) 96 98 01
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax (02) 96 79 97 81
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano)
Japan
Assembly Toyoda-cho SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814
Service Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun
Shizuoka prefecture, P.O. Box 438-0818
Korea
Assembly Ansan-City SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51
Sales B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate Fax (031) 4 92-80 56
Service Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong master@sew-korea.co.kr
Ansan 425-120
Luxembourg
Assembly Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax (010) 2313 36
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Macedonia
Sales Skopje SGS-Skopje / Macedonia Tel. (0991) 38 43 90
"Teodosij Sinactaski” Fax (0991) 38 43 90
6691000 Skopje / Macedonia
Malaysia
Assembly Johore SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax (07) 3 5414 04
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
9
Address list
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Tel. +31 10 44 63 700
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 41 55 552
Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam http://www.vector.nu
Postbus 10085 info@vector.nu
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65
Service 82 Greenmount drive sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za
East Tamaki Auckland
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51
10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. (69) 2410 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax (69) 2410 40
Service N-1599 Moss sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES Tel. (511) 349-52 80
Sales S.A.C. Fax (511) 349-30 02
Service Los Calderos # 120-124 sewperu@terra.com.pe
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Poland
Sales Lodz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. (042) 6 16 22 00
ul. Pojezierska 63 Fax (042) 6 16 22 10
91-338 Lodz sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. (0231) 20 96 70
Sales Apartado 15 Fax (0231) 20 36 85
Service P-3050-901 Mealhada infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
Sales Bucuresti Sialco Trading SRL Tel. (01) 2 30 13 28
Service str. Madrid nr.4 Fax (01) 2 30 71 70
71222 Bucuresti sialco@mediasat.ro
Russia
Sales St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (812) 3 26 09 41 + 5 35 04 30
P.O. Box 193 Fax (812) 5 35 22 87
193015 St. Petersburg sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Singapore
Assembly SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. 8 62 17 01-705
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax 8 61 28 27
Service Jurong Industrial Estate Telex 38 659
Singapore 638644
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax 00386 3 490 83 21
SLO – 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
10
Address list
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 494 23 11
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads ljansen@sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Capetown SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552 98 20
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552 98 30
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 700 34 51
2 Monaceo Place Fax +27 31 700 38 47
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. 9 44 31 84 70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax 9 44 31 84 71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. (036) 34 42 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax (036) 34 42 80
Service S-55303 Jönköping www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-55003 Jönköping
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. (061) 4 17 17 17
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax (061) 4 17 17 00
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Thailand
Assembly Chon Buri SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22
Sales Bangpakong Industrial Park 2 Fax 0066-38 21 45 31
Service 700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
Muang District
Chon Buri 20000
Turkey
Assembly Istanbul SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3
Sales Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti 83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15
Service Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67
TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr
USA
Production Greenville SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37
Assembly 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66
Telex 805 550
Assembly San Francisco SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60
Sales 30599 San Antonio St. Fax (510) 4 87-63 81
Service Hayward, California 94544-7101
Philadelphia/PA SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77
Pureland Ind. Complex Fax (856) 8 45-31 79
200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Dayton SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36
2001 West Main Street Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99
Troy, Ohio 45373
Dallas SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24
3950 Platinum Way Fax (214) 3 30-47 24
Dallas, Texas 75237
11
Address list
USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04
Sales Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75
Service Zona Industrial Municipal Norte sewventas@cantr.net
Valencia sewfinanzas@cantr.net
12
8 • Spare parts and service
Spare parts list by major groups

rev.
Page 1 of 1
Article No: 1004850 GENERAL ASSEMBLY date:
Drawing No: 1004850 - sign: RGT 2005-07-15
Serial No: - EH170U rev: - -
Customer: Gottwald
Standard: 440V AC - 115V AC - 60Hz / CANopen
Item Quant Title Material / Article No. Dwg No. Art. No. Remarks
Frame std 16930, Lifting beam 23951 & 23952, Main
1 1 Frame EH170U 1002141 1002141
beam twin twenty 16164, Main beam 62493
2 2 Telescopic beam unit 24142 24142 Telescopic beam 38860, Gable end 16989
3 1 Tower 24161 24161
4 1 Tension rod 23854 23854
5 1 Tension rod 23855 23855
6 1 Frame std. components 24143 24143
7 1 Tower std. components 17023 17023
8 2 Twistlock assembly ISO, STD, LEFT 1002945 1002945 Floating ISO, Ø100
9 2 Twistlock assembly ISO, STD, RIGHT 1002946 1002946 Floating ISO, Ø100
10 2 Cable chain assy. 37409 37409
11 1 Tower, Cable chain assy. 39047 39047
12 2 Twin twenty housing 17652 17652
13 1 Hydraulic assy. 39311 39311
14 2 Pump unit assy. 34375 34375
15 1 Twin, Pump unit assy. 39217 39217
16 2 Flipper arm assy. 24169 24169
17 1 Gearbox assy. telescopic 39055 39055
18 1 Gearbox assy. tower 44768 44768
19 1 Decoration 16444 16444
20 1 Electrical system 1002493 1002493 SCS² / CANopen parallel interface
21 2 LED-panel mount. det. 1001444 1001444
22 2 LED-cover assy. 1002189 1002189 Bolted on twinhousing (Blue LED)
23 1 El.customised 1002655 1002655 115V AC / SCS² / CANopen parallel interface
24
25
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE

COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
48
3 33 47 4 32
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
1 49
35
36
37 50
16 20
26 34 17 10 21 14
7
39
43
38
8
39
9
2
24
15
29
11 23
5 43
6 44
38
22 43 44 20 38
28 43
41
18
38
12 43
31 46
25 39
40 38 36 43 42
30 19
38
43
39
45 27
SIGN DATE GENERAL ASSY SERIAL No SPREADER TYPE SURFACE TOLERANCE GENERAL
DESIGNED TREATMENT SS-ISO 2768
Illtek 021029 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Tower
A Partek Company
SP-52001
EH5 Tower New standard
DRAWING SP-52001
PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY POS REMARKS
401517 GLIDE PLATE ASSY 1 0 Include pos.6,7,14,20
38863 TOWER CHAIN ASSY 1 0 Include pos. 5,9,11,12,15,23,24
24161 TOWER 1 1
1 SEE OTHER DRAWING 0 2 See SP-52002
51624 LIFTING SHAFT 90x334 1 3 Included in Pos 48
54662 LOCKING SHAFT ASSY 1 4 Included in Pos 48
71529 TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN 4 5
39026 ROBALON PLATE LOWER 4 6
53137 GLIDE PLATE UPPER TOWER EH5 8 7
45476 CRANK ASSY EH5 1 8
401372 CHAIN ATTACHMENT 1 9
56242 CABLE CLAMP D=34 2 10
700737 CHAIN DUPLEX 1 1/2" 1 11
71520 CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2" 2 12
den 10 oktober 2002 Sida 1 av 4

401518 STEERING PIN 16 14
43075 LOCKING PLATE 12X12X40 1 15
401534 CABLE ATTACHMENT 4 16 Include pos. 10,17,21,26,34
401074 COVER PLATE 1 17
39171 BRACKET UPPER RIGHT 1 18
39174 BRACKET LOWER RIGHT 1 19
75497 SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9 32 20
78218 SCREW M6S 12X120 FZB 8.8 2 21
75051 SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 4 22
75713 SCREW MC6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 1 23
700736 SCREW M6S 24x160 FZB 8.8 2 24
75052 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB 4 25
75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 2 26
39173 BRACKET LOWER LEFT 1 27
75292 WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 4 28
75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 1 29
39170 BRACKET UPPER LEFT 1 30

74339 WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB 4 31
72191 SCHACKLE "RAK GALV" 4 32 Included in Pos 48
85482 CHAIN HLZ 4.5-2 L=250 3 33 Included in Pos 48
75291 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 4 34
54528 ATTACHMENT CABLE WAGON 1 35
75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 10 36
75225 SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8 2 37
75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 16 38
70006 SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 16 39
401471 ANGEL BAR 1 40
401547 ANGLE BAR 1 42
70006 SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 5 44
401546 ANGLE BAR 1 45
24199 FRAME SCS2 1 46
700457 SNAP HOOK 1 47 Included in Pos 48
45596 LIFTING SHAFT ASSY 1 48 Include Pos. 3,4,32,33,47

46679 MOUNTING EL.CAB. 4 49 See also drawing SP-52013
24263 SPREADER CABINET TOWER 1 50


14 11 35 10 33 34 39 36 43 4
20
12
19 25
18
29 8
45 24
23
22
40 9
32 13
21
1 12 6
26
13
7 12
44 15
5
2 41
3
31 42
38
48 27
47
17 37 28 30 46 16
Illtek 021002 EH5 ll
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Tower gear box assy
A Partek Company
SP-52002
EH5 Tower Gearbox Assy
DRAWING SP-52002
58549 GEARBOX R97 ELM.BRAKE 360-404V 1 1 Part no for gearbox is 72157 and for only El motor is 58538
54659 MOTOR SHELF EH5 TOWER 1 2
52196 CHAIN COVER TOWER EH5 1 3
51233 COVERPLATE CHAIN WHEEL EH5 1 4
53129 CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 25 1 5
36609 CHAIN WHEEL 2 6
34379 CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 1 7
52150 TRANSMISSION SHAFT DIA 80 1 8
44756 SHAFT ASSY EH5 2 9
71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 2 10
71546 BEARINGHOUSE SNL 518-615 2 11
71548 SEALING TSNA 518A TOWER 3 12 SEAL KIT
48188 DISTANS 4 13
71547 BEARING BUSH 2 14

71519 CHAIN 1 1/2" DUPLEX TOWER 1 15
71520 CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2" 1 16
70622 SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9 1 17
71539 BEARING 22218 CCK W33 TOWER 2 18
71549 DISTANCE 4 19
74119 COVER BEARINGHOUSE ASNH518-615 1 20
51517 CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 13 1 21
44196 LOCKING PLATE 1X20X46 2 22
75092 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 4 23
76847 KEY 22X14X100 SMS2307 1 24
73965 KEY 22X14X100 SMS 2306 1 25
79513 KEY 18X11X100 RK 1 26
75225 SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8 4 27
75286 SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP 1 28
70474 SCREW M6S 20X 80 FZB 8.8 4 29
75008 SCREW M6S 20X 70 FZB 8.8 1 30

76848 SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 FULLT 2 31
1 SEE REMARKS 1 33 CAP (SEW)
75051 SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 4 34
70477 SCREW M6S 16X 80 FZB 8.8 4 35
75225 SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8 3 36
75285 LOCKING WASHER M20 1 37
70479 NUT M20 M6M FZB KLASS 8 2 38
70622 SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9 1 41
44769 WASHER 1 44
70919 WASHER NORD-LOCK M20 4 45
71521 CHAIN LOCK1/2 LINK DUPL.1 1/2" 1 46



13
7
15 14
16
32
25
8 26
36
37
22
24
18 33
5 21
23 35
31
20 10 2
4 19 34
12 11
3
29
17
6 28
30
27
Illtek 020903 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Frame
A Partek Company
SP-52003
EH5 Frame
DRAWING SP-52003
16997 FRAME 1 1
43072 LIFTING LUG ASSY 4 2 Include pos.10,11,21,23,31,34,
401278 GLIDE PLATE FRAME 2 3 Included in Glide plate assy See drawing SP-52004
401401 FRAME COVER ASSY 4 4 Include pos.12,19,20
43036 GLIDE PLATE 80X40X20 1 5
401279 20´STOP ASSY 4 6 Include pos.17,27,28,29,30
1 SEE REMARKS 0 7 See lamp assy SP- 52010
401277 LANDING BUFFER ASSY 4 8 Include pos.25,26,32,36,37
1 SEE REMARKS 0 9 See Drawing SP 52006
47805 PLATE 1 10
38865 COVER 1 12
1 SEE REMARKS 0 15 See Electric drawing part list
48392 CLIP 3 16 Complete clip with screw,washer and nut

401281 SHIM 2 17
75497 SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9 2 18
75092 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 2 19
54855 FLAT BAR 1 20
75051 SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 6 21
79830 WASHER SRB 14X28X2 FZB 2 25
49853 SLEEV 2 26
75607 SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 2 27
401280 20´BUFFER 1 28
401282 HOLDER FOR GLIDE PLATE 1 29
75295 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB 2 30
51110 LIFTING LUG WELD 1 31
76332 GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT 4 33

401276 BUFFER 1 36
79141 SCREW M6S 12X 35 FZB 8.8 2 37


17
19 25 16
15
18
2
10
11 9
13
20
12 3
24
15
14
10
22
21
23 1
6
5
7
8
4
6
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Telescopic Beam
A Partek Company
SP-52004
EH5 Telescopic Beam
DRAWING SP-52004
38861 GLIDE PLATE ASSY 2 0 Include pos. 4,5,6,7,8 and pos 3 on drawing SP-52003
24142 TELESCOPIC BEAM ASSY 1 1 Assy with 2 Beams and 1 Gable end
62595 FLIPPER ARM 1 2 Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11
44615 GLIDE PLATE LOWER 20X100X200 2 4
44614 GLIDE PLATE UPPER 25X100X250 2 5
75756 SCREW MF6S 12X 70 FZB 10.9 4 6
1 SEE REMARKS 3 10 See Drawing SP-52009
401528 BUFFER ASSY 1 11 Include pos.12,13,14,15,16
401529 BUFFER 1 12 Included in pos.11
401530 SHIM PLATE 2 13 Included in pos.11

75783 SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 2 14 Included in pos.11
75291 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 4 15 Included in pos.11
75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 2 16 Included in pos.11
51593 ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45 1 17 Included in pos. 19
75330 SCREW MC6S 16X 50 FZB 8.8 2 18 Included in pos. 19
51593 ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45 1 19 Include Pos.17, 18, 25.
76842 SCREW M6S 20X110 FZB 8.8 4 20
47678 SPACER (M20) 4 22
70918 WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB 2 25 Included in pos. 19


15
2 3 38 53 54 55 231
47 10 13 12 16 17 59 19 58 40 41 23 65 37
4
34
57 49
35
33 32
56 42
43 7
24
45 61 18 14 51 14 25 28 22
11 39
44
31
62 60 20 28 29 30
46
8 9 74 63
27
26
36
71
68
72
67 73
52
64
69
69 70 66 65 70
Illtek 020926 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Hydraulic Assy End beam
A Partek Company
SP-52005
EH5 Hydraulic Assy
DRAWING SP-52005
76526 HYDRAULIC OIL ISO VG 32 50 50L OIL
56350 HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87 2 1
74564 COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8" 13 2
44447 COUPLING RESTRICT.GE10SR 1.2MM 3 3
71864 COUPLING SV10-S 6 4
71877 COUPLING GE12-SR 1/2" 2 5
79801 PRESSURE FILTER (50L) PI3605- 1 6
71297 FILTER INSERT 1 7
78371 SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR 3 8
76196 HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC 3 9 SEE DRAWING SP-52009 FOR MORE DETAILS
56360 HOSE 821-06/KL 580/P86/P86 1 10
24 June 2003 Sida 1 av 6

71872 COUPLING GE20-S 1 1/16"-12 UNF 2 11
71874 COUPLING GE12-S 9/16"-18 UNF 1 12
44553 DRAIN PIPE EH5 1 13
71764 COUPLING 3.5/28 1 14
78960 AIR BREATHER 3"MY" 1 15
71290 VALVE RHD12-S NON RETURN 2 16
73380 COUPLING EDKO 12-S 2 17
71320 HYDRAULIC PUMP PVQ10 1 18 WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT FOR THIS PUMP PLEASE STATE K4264
72005 ELMOTOR 2.2kW 380/415/440/480 1 19
58016 HOSE 821-06/KL 460/P86/P86 1 20
56334 HOSE 821-06/KL 560/P86/P87 1 22
73096 VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-60 4 23 WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT PLEASE STATE PART NO K4222 AND SOLENOID 70422
700735 VALV BLOCK 1 24

75195 SCREW MC6S 8X100 12.9 DIN912 2 25
71871 COUPLING GE12-SR 3/8" 2 28
70157 COUPLING VSTI 3/8"-JE 4 29
56350 HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87 1 30
71866 COUPLING GE10-SR 1/4" 4 31
57419 HOSE 821-04/KL 630/P86/P86 2 32
56349 HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87 2 33
56348 HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87 2 34
56348 HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87 2 35
71343 SIGHT GLASS AS240 R 3/4" 2 36
56349 HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87 2 37

56350 HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87 2 38
56349 HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87 1 39
57425 HOSE 821-06/KL 770/P86/P86 1 40
75375 SCREW MC6S 5X 30 12.9 OBEH 16 41
44552 SUCTION PIPE EH5 1 43
45965 PLUG VSTIR 1/2" KOMPL. 1 44
71896 COUPLING KOR20-12-S 1 45
70084 COUPLING MÄTNIP.ST-04-R FORM A 1 46
79019 PLASTIC RING FOR COUPLI. 71764 1 51
46799 FLAP GB. EH130/600 2 52
34224 GASKET HYD.TANK EH5 1 53
39221 HYDR.TANK LID EH5 1 54

75212 SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8 10 55
K3726 O-RING (HYDRV./BLOCK) 4 56
75294 WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 4 57
1 SEE REMARKS 1 58 KEY FOR MOTOR SHAFT ON EL.MOTOR PART NO 72005
1 SEE REMARKS 1 59 KEY FOR PUMP PART NO 71320
70040 SCREW SK6SS 6X 10 8.8 1 60
75290 SCREW M6S 10X 30 FZB 8.8 2 61
70403 CUP SPRING 23X10.2X1.25 D-2093 2 62
79281 PLUG IN BOX 8' OFF 1 63
75552 WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB 6 64
401400 FLATBAR 1 65
401399 FLAP 1 66

44762 FLAT BAR 1 67
44760 FLAP EH5 1 68
75669 SCREW M6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 14 70
75329 WASHER BRB 4.3X 9X0.8 FZB HB2 4 72
79265 SCREW MC6S 4X 25 FZB 8.8 4 73


8 6 5 2 7 18
26
25
1 7 4 5 7 3 9 10 13 15 16
12
11
23
22
19 20 14
24 17
21
28
27
30 29
Illtek 020910 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Telescopic Gearbox Assy
A Partek Company
SP-52006
EH5 Telescopic Gearbox Assy
DRAWING SP-52006
53596 SHAFT 1 1
53603 DISTANCE 1 2
53604 DISTANCE 1 3
53605 DISTANCE 1 4
73562 BEARING 22212 CC W33 2 5
74243 LOCKING RING SGA 60 1 6
73573 RUBBER SEALING V-70A 3 7
53595 COVER 1 8
53594 COVER 1 9
75212 SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8 12 10
700730 KEY 18X11X80 1 11
73564 KEY 18X11X 40 1 12
51515 CHAIN WHEEL E112-1-11 1 13
51664 WASHER 6X21X80 1 14

75285 LOCKING WASHER M20 1 15
75286 SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP 1 16
75289 SCREW M6S 20X 35 FZB 8.8 1 17
39055 GEARBOX ASSY TELESCOPIC 1 19 Include Pos.27-30
401287 PLATE 1 20
75008 SCREW M6S 20X 70 FZB 8.8 2 21
79785 SCREW M6S 10X 50 FZB 8.8 4 24
75294 WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 8 25
62345 EL MOTOR 3 KW BRAKE 230V 1 27
700743 GEARBOX KA87 1 28
79680 COUPLING GEARBOX+ELMOTOR KA87 1 29
77779 BRAKE ASSY 230V BM4 INCL.HR 1 30


8 25 7 6 25 24 9
20 17 28 20 4
15
28
29 9
10
S*
17 22 21
13 28
S* 17
17 S*
3
17
14 15
23
19
26
1 30
12
16
11
Illtek 020926 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Twistlock ISO Floating
A Partek Company
SP-52007
EH5 Twistlock Assy Type1 Part no 62343
DRAWING SP-52007
62343 TWISTLOCK ASSY TYPE1 ISO 1 0 Complete Twistlock assy include pos.1-4,6-17,19-30
16060 TWISTLOCK PIN ISO 1 1
22238 GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING 1 2
53968 WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 1 3
43653 TWISTLOCK ARM ASSY T.1 1 4
79098 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B 1 6
44524 NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. 1 7
700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 1 8
54049 SPACER RING 2 9
74147 HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 1 10
37704 BLOCKADING PIN 1 11
70429 SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB 1 12

74044 LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 2 15
74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 6 17
57095 PAD FOR SWITCH H=12 2 19
700763 SCREW M6S 6X100 FZB 8.8 4 20
700685 SCREW M6S 6X130 FZB 8.8 2 21
43654 BLOCKADING PIECE 1 23
46609 LOCKING PLATE 2 26
79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 3 29
48916 SENSOR ATTACHMENT 1 30

EH5 Twistlock Assy Type2 Part no 62344
DRAWING SP-52007
62344 TWISTLOCK ASSY TYPE2 ISO 1 0 Complete Twistlock assy include pos.1-3,5-17,19-30
16060 TWISTLOCK PIN ISO 1 1
22238 GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING 1 2
53968 WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 1 3
57059 TWISTLOCK ARM T.2 1 4
79098 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B 1 6
44524 NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. 1 7
700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 1 8
54049 SPACER RING 2 9
74147 HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 1 10
37704 BLOCKADING PIN 1 11
70429 SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB 1 12

74044 LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 2 15
74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 6 17
700763 SCREW M6S 6X100 FZB 8.8 4 20
700685 SCREW M6S 6X130 FZB 8.8 2 21
43654 BLOCKADING PIECE 1 23
46609 LOCKING PLATE 2 26
79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 3 29
48916 SENSOR ATTACHMENT 1 30


6
7
9
13
10
3 4
S*
5
2
1
8
10
10
11 12
Single Sensor assembly SP10
6
9
7
10 13
15
4
S*
5
2
1
8
10
10 12
11
Dual Sensor assembly SP11
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Sensor Assy
A Partek Company
SP-52008
Single Sensor Assy Part no 38084 SP-52008
Pos Part no Description Qty Remarks
0 38084 SENSOR SINGEL ASSY 0 Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
1 38082 SINGLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT 1 Welded parts on frame
2 400267 PLATE 1
3 38087 PROTECTION PLATE 1
4 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 1
5 53951 PAD FOR SWITCH H=22 1
6 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 2
7 75268 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB 2
8 75102 SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8 2
9 75422 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 2
10 75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 6
11 75090 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB 4
12 76728 WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB 2
13 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 1

Dual Sensor Assy Part no 38085 SP-52008
Pos Part no Description Qty Remarks
0 38085 DUAL SENSOR ASSY 1 Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
1 38083 DOUBLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT 0 Welded part on Frame
2 400267 PLATE 2
3 38086 PROTECTION PLATE 1
4 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 2
5 53951 PAD FOR SWITCH H=22 2
6 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 4
8 75102 SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8 4
9 75422 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 2
12 76728 WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB 4
13 79850 COVER PLATE DEP 4 2


9
19
16
3
17
1
13
15
20 12
21 7
5
10 6
22
8
2
19
18 11 6 4
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Gearbox
A Partek Company
SP-52009
EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 53275
DRAWING SP-52009
53275 GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1 1 0 Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Drawn)
51176 GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL 1 1
55503 SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL 1 2
51177 COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL 1 3
54465 GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 1 4
54463 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 1 5
54590 BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING 2 6
51284 BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING 1 7
72010 KEY 20X12X 30 TK 3 8
76196 HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC 1 10
75049 SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 1 11
70548 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 1 12
79683 KEY 32X8X7 1 13

78493 SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 3 17
76922 VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN 1 21
76915 SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR 1 22

DRAWING SP-52009
60629 GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 2 1 0 Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)
54465 GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 1 4
54463 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 1 5
72010 KEY 20X12X 30 TK 3 8
76900 GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR 1 9
75049 SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 1 11
70548 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 1 12
79683 KEY 32X8X7 1 13

78493 SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 3 17

DRAWING SP-52009
60628 GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1 1 0 Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Drawn)
54465 GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 1 4
54463 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 1 5
72010 KEY 20X12X 30 TK 3 8
76900 GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR 1 9
75049 SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 1 11
70548 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 1 12
79683 KEY 32X8X7 1 13

78493 SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 3 17

DRAWING SP-52009
56230 GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 2 1 0 Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)
54465 GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 1 4
54463 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 1 5
72010 KEY 20X12X 30 TK 3 8
75049 SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 1 11
70548 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 1 12
79683 KEY 32X8X7 1 13

78493 SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 3 17


27
11
23 E14
Red 24
19 8
28 26
10
1 29 BA15D BA15S
B22 E27
30
31
32
7
14
15 9
25
34 5
20
12 35 2
36
33 3
Green 21
Clear
4
13
16
17 6
18 22 Blue
Illtek 020918 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Lamp Assy 3 lamps
A Partek Company
SP-52010
Lamp Assy Part no 61094
DRAWING SP-52010
61094 SIGNAL LAMP ASSY 1 0 Include pos. 1-6, 10, 12-17
71016 LAMP LARGE RED WISKA 1 1
71018 LAMP LARGE GREEN WISKA 1 2
73118 LAMP LARGE CLEAR WISKA 1 3
37432 PLATE 1 4
85335 BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50 2 5
70390 RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396 4 6
73361 LAMP SOCKET BA15D WISKA 3 7
44382 ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET 1 12 Include pos. 33,34,35,36
70456 PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION 1 13
75092 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 6 14

71417 LAMP GLOBE RED (LARGE) 1 19
71418 LAMP GLOBE GREEN (LARGE) 1 20
71822 LAMP GLOBE CLEAR (LARGE) 1 21
74600 LAMP GLOBE BLUE (LARGE) 1 22
71436 BULB 220V 60W B22 3 23
71435 BULB 220V 40W B22 3 23
71438 BULB 24V 40W B22 3 23
71437 BULB 130V 40W B22 3 23
71434 BULB 60W 230V E27 3 24
76392 BULB 24V 24W BA15S 3 25
73816 BULB 24V 25W Ba15d 3 26
73817 BULB 220V 25W Ba15d 3 26
75622 BULB 130V 25W BA15d 3 26
73495 BULB 110V 25 W E14 3 27
K1415 SEAL FOR SIGNAL LAMP GLOBE LARGE 0 28
76866 SCREW MCS 4X7 MÄSSING OBEH. 1 29

700238 LAMP HOUSING 1 31
x SEE REMARKS 1 32 Included in complete lamp assy
44912 WASHER 1 33
76868 WASHER IZ 4.3 FZB 2 35
76867 WASHER BRB MÄSSING 4.3 OBEH 2 36

Lamp Assy Part no 61095
DRAWING SP-52010
61095 SIGNAL LAMP ASSY 1 0 Include pos. 1-6, 11-17
71016 LAMP LARGE RED WISKA 1 1
71018 LAMP LARGE GREEN WISKA 1 2
73118 LAMP LARGE CLEAR WISKA 1 3
37432 PLATE 1 4
85335 BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50 2 5
70390 RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396 4 6
73361 LAMP SOCKET BA15D WISKA 3 7
44382 ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET 1 12 Include pos. 33,34,35,36
70456 PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION 1 13
75092 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 6 14

71417 LAMP GLOBE RED (LARGE) 1 19
71418 LAMP GLOBE GREEN (LARGE) 1 20
71822 LAMP GLOBE CLEAR (LARGE) 1 21
74600 LAMP GLOBE BLUE (LARGE) 1 22
71438 BULB 24V 40W B22 3 23
71437 BULB 130V 40W B22 3 23
71435 BULB 220V 40W B22 3 23
71436 BULB 220V 60W B22 3 23
71434 BULB 60W 230V E27 3 24
76392 BULB 24V 24W BA15S 3 25
75622 BULB 130V 25W BA15d 3 26
73816 BULB 24V 25W Ba15d 3 26
73817 BULB 220V 25W Ba15d 3 26
73495 BULB 110V 25 W E14 3 27
K1415 SEAL FOR SIGNAL LAMP GLOBE LARGE 0 28

700238 LAMP HOUSING 1 31
x SEE REMARKS 1 32 Included in complete lamp assy
44912 WASHER 1 33
76868 WASHER IZ 4.3 FZB 2 35


2
35
9 36 52
33 53
34 47
39
46
42
43
45 14
44
48
41
7 54
40
3 28
37 29
38 27
25 8
30
31
32
26
13
1 48
49
50 5
51
10 11 15 16
4
23 18 22 17 20 21 24 19
12
Illtek 020911 EH5
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Telescopic Drive
A Partek Company
SP-52012
EH5 Telescopic Drive
DRAWING SP-52012
23855 TENSION ROD 1 1
16441 TELESCOPIC DRIVE ATT. ASSY 1 2 See Telescopic assy Drawing SP-52006
38073 CHAIN ASSY 2 3 Include pos.7,37,38
400242 TENSION ROD PIN ASSY 1 4 Include pos. 10,11,15,16
400244 END STOP ASSY 1 5 Include pos. 49,50,51,55
23854 TENSION ROD 1 6
61698 SHOCK ABSORBER 2 7 Includ pos.39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,54
37409 CABLE CHAIN ASSY 1 8 Include pos.25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32
39047 CABLE CHAIN TOWER ASSY 1 9 Include pos.33,34,35,36
46744 SHAFT (TENSION ROD PIN ASSY) 1 10 Included in pos.4
400241 WASHER 1 11 Included in pos.4
38862 PEDESTAL BEARING 1 12 Include pos. 17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24
38084 SENSOR SINGEL ASSY 2 13 See Drawing SP-52008
38085 DUAL SENSOR ASSY 1 14 See Drawing SP-52008

75267 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB 2 15 Included in pos.4
46773 SHAFT 1 17 Included in pos.12
46765 CHAIN WHEEL 1 18 Included in pos.12
73562 BEARING 22212 CC W33 2 21 Included in pos.12
73950 KEY 12X 8X 30 DIN 6885 B TK 1 22 Included in pos.12
74243 LOCKING RING SGA 60 2 23 Included in pos.12
71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 1 24 Included in pos.12
37408 CABLE CHAIN 1 25 Included in pos.8
46771 GLIDE BLOCK 1 26 Included in pos.8
75499 SCREW MC6S 5X 16 FZB 8.8 2 27 Included in pos.8
75150 NUT M 5 LOC-KING FZB 3 28 Included in pos.8
75323 WASHER BRB 5.3X10X1 FZB HB200 3 29 Included in pos.8
79834 SCREW MC6S 5X 20 FZB 1 30 Included in pos.8
79835 SCREW MC6S 5X 12 FZB 1 31 Included in pos.8

75445 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 5 FZB 1 32 Included in pos.8
38996 CABLE CHAIN TOWER 1 33 Included in pos.9
75497 SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9 4 34 Included in pos.9
75328 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 4 36 Included in pos.9
71512 CHAIN LOCK SIMPLEX 1 1/2" 177H 4 37 included in pos.3
47468 CHAIN SIMPLEX 1 1/2"177H 119 2 38 included in pos.3
53434 LINK SHOCK ABSORBER 1 39 Included in pos.7
59899 LINK L1=341 L2=381 1 40 Included in pos.7
59897 TUBE 35X2 L=196 1 41 Included in pos.7
53435 NUT SHOCK ABSORBER 1 42 Included in pos.7
74686 NUT M30 LOC-KING FZB KLASS 8 1 43 Included in pos.7
75293 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 4 45 Included in pos.7
71529 TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN 2 47 Included in pos.7
71686 CUP SPRING 71X36X4 No18 36 48 Included in pos.7

46757 SHIM 4 49 Include in pos.5
75267 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB 2 50 Include in pos.5
78498 SCREW M6S 8X 40 FZB 8.8 2 51 Include in pos.5
70142 CLAMP 01-110 PP 2 52
75099 SCREW M6S 6X 40 FZB 8.8 2 53
71633 NUT M30 ML6M FZB 2 54 Included in pos.7
46743 END STOP 1 55 Include in pos.5


5
9
3
8 2
4
7
6
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Frame, Power cabinet
A Partek Company
SP-52013
EH5 Electric Cabinet
DRAWING SP-52013
46679 MOUNTING EL.CAB. 4 0 Include pos. 5,6,7,8,9
24473 ELECTRIC CABINET 1 1
1 SEE REMARKS 1 2 Included in Electric Cabinet
77906 SCHACKLE M6 STAINLESS 2 3
86254 CHAIN HL3 L=160 SS2343 1 4
78557 RUBBER BUFFER 17-1480-50 1 5
75607 SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 2 6
75291 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 3 7


21 23 22 6 7 9
13
30
12
27
8 26
17 11
19
18 28
20
3
14
16
4
15
24
10 5
2 25
32 31 35 34 33 1 29
Illtek 031013 EH170 U
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Twinlift boxes
A Partek Company
SP-52014
17652 Twin Housing Assy
SP-DRAWING NO: 52014
SP-POS PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE
1 17646 RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT 1 See Drawing SP -52015
2 17607 RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK HOUSE LEFT 1
3 17643 RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK HOUSE RIGHT 1
4 39076 PIVOT PIN RETRACTABLE HOUSING 2
5 400887 PIN RETRACTABLE CYLINDER 2
6 23805 CYLINDER CONNECTION OFFSET LINK 2
7 400888 CYLINDER PIN 4
8 39909 TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT LEFT HAND 1
9 39908 TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT RIGHT HAND 1
10 39916 SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET LEFT 1
11 39915 SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET RIGHT 1
12 402534 SPACER 2
13 39891 CYLINDER 65/40-250 TWINL.EH170 2
14 78489 SCREW MC6S 12X180 FZB 8.8 2
15 75055 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 8
16 75291 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 4
den 19 november 2003 Page 1 of 2

17 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 8
18 75100 SCREW M6S 6X 45 FZB 8.8 8
20 79850 COVER PLATE DEP4 4
21 75052 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB 2
22 700348 SHLD BOLT.D=24/M20X70 LG.12.9 2
23 70009 SPLIT PIN 3,2X25 8
24 74270 SPLIT PIN 3.2X63 FZB 4
25 75335 WASHER BRFB 26X45X4 FZB HB200 4
27 75294 WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 2
28 75783 SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 6
29 62907 RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT 1 See Drawing SP -52015
30 701244 WASHER TBRSUB 26X65X10 STEEL F 4
31 70145 CLAMP 02-218 PP (SIZE 2) 8
32 76914 CLAMP 02-214-PP 8
33 700646 SCREW M6S 6X 70 FZB 8.8 8


19 4
14 29 28 23 24 26 2
1
12
17 27 25
21 29
11
S*
13
20
15
30
6
19
25
26 18 8
24
23 10 16
22
5
31
S*
9 7
Illtek 031027 EH170 U
PLOT DATE
SCALE REVISION
Exploded View
ARTICLE No
E DRAWING NUMBER
Retractable Twistlock Assembly
A Partek Company
SP-52015
62907 Twin Twistlock Assy Right
SP-DRAWING NO: 52015
2 61751 SENSOR MOUNTING WELDMENT 1
4 62906 TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT 1
5 402514 PLUNGER SENSOR TRIP 1
6 402515 BLOCKADING KEY 1
7 39879 BLOCKADING PIN 1
8 701243 SPRING 2X25X58 DIN2098 1
9 16060 TWISTLOCK PIN ISO 1
10 22238 GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING 1
12 61687 CYLINDER ARM ASSY RIGHT 1
13 53968 WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 1
14 44524 NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. 1
16 75631 WASHER 22X34X4 FZB DIN 1440 1
17 74147 HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 1
18 71328 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" 2
19 74044 LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 2

20 402258 CYLINDER BOLT 1
21 402257 SPACER RING 1
22 700322 SPRING PIN 6X36 FRP 2
23 74970 CLAMP 04-430 PP 6
25 75100 SCREW M6S 6X 45 FZB 8.8 6
27 700647 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 1
30 70918 WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB 1
31 79098 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B 1

• How to order spare parts and/or service
All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done by the Bromma e-commerce
website. To order the requested spare parts some important information must be
available.
The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3or the dataplate mounted on
main frame of the current spreader.
The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See Spare part list.
Registered User
To be able to log in at the Bromma e-commerce site you must be a registered user.
To become a registered user you have to fill in the Application Form on the Bromma
website. After a few days you will receive an User ID and a password by e-mail.
When you are a regitered user fill in your User ID and password at the fields on the
Bromma e-commerce website (www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Search Function
If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if you have any other
problems finding valid part numbers you can use the search function on the website
or call your local Bromma dealer. The phone number is published on the website
at www.bromma.com/distributors/index.asp
FOR SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS PLEASE CONTACT:
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Krossgatan 31-33
S-162 26 VÄLLINGBY
SWEDEN
Telephone no. 46 +8 620 09 00

Fax no. 46 +8 739 37 86
Telex no. 12224
To avoid damage to property or personal injury when replacing parts, always

use BROMMA CONQUIP AB original parts.

rev.2
9 • Hydraulic circuit diagrams

rev.
10 • Electrical wiring diagrams

rev
GETTING STARTED
WITH
SCS²
1 REV 3
Index
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4
DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4
General............................................................................................................................ 4
The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5
Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5
Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6
CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7
I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7
Common junction........................................................................................................ 8
Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8
Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9
Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9
I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10
ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10
System view .............................................................................................................. 10
Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11
Component view ....................................................................................................... 11
Load view.................................................................................................................. 14
ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
General.......................................................................................................................... 15
Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15
Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16
APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18
ABE............................................................................................................................... 18
ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20
General.......................................................................................................................... 20
BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21
Power connector........................................................................................................ 21
BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21
Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21
Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21
APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22
General...................................................................................................................... 22
The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22
From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23
2 REV 3
Teach......................................................................................................................... 23
EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24
General...................................................................................................................... 24
Hardware................................................................................................................... 24
Software .................................................................................................................... 25
Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26
3 REV 3
Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.
I/O LED Field RS232 Display &

X2- I/O, bus bus
X1- I/O 1-48 (X5) Power
& supply X3- I/O
Connector LEDS
Connector Connector
Digital I/O
General
Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with
one input and the other with one output.
Switch
Input
Slave (A1)
CAN network (BCAN) SCS2
B1 Master
Output
Valve
4 REV 3
The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility
of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is
easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw
there is a number 7, 8 or 9.
connection
The X2 key
should be
marked “8”
Front view of X2 connector
Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins
9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10)
correspond to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are correspond to ”ones”. A master
node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader
Node)
A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together.
Start with making “ID” jumpers.
And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.
5 REV 3
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector
due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The
potential is measured between the A section and the B section.
Name Pin number in
connector
24INA X2/42 Potential 1
24INA X2/43
24INB X2/45 Potential 2
24INB X2/44
CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector.
All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and
CAN Low to be able to establish communication.
Name Pin number in
connector
CAN High X2/30
CAN Low X2/40
Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id,
CAN bus and power supply connected.
ID SUPPLY CAN BUS
+
24V Supply
-
Low
CAN Bus High
ID
9 10 19 29 30 40 42 43 44 45 49 10 19 29 30 39 40 42 43 44 45 49
B1 X2 A1 X2
Pin no.
CAN-bus
24V SUPPLY
6 REV 3
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)
Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them
in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number “7” on the front of the
connector, and the X3 connector by the number “9”.
connection
key

I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an
output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups.
I/O 45 to 48 are single I/O’s. Each group has a “Common” junction. This makes it
possible to have different voltages in each group.
Name Description X1 pin

number
I/O-9 General purpose input or output 26
Common/Supply 3 Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 8
Name Description X3 pin
number
Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48 20
7 REV 3
Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for
inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can
be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.
G roup used as Input G roup used as O utput

L/24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S SC S
9 10 11 12 9 10
SC S 11 12
8 26 16 6 7 8 26 16 6 7
I/O M oduls
In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group
is used as outputs.
Internal jumper bars

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups
of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The
following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves
with common potential.
Pin number Link Pin number Link

configuration configuration
12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
(Only in X1) 24 29
32 37
33 39
34 38
(Only in X1) 45 (Only in X1) 36
8 REV 3
Connecting a switch
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1.
One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is
connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
Internal jumper groups
N/0V Supply
Switch
Cablage
6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27 X1 Connector
11 12
One Input group
10 9
SCS Internal
Connecting a valve
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1.
One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the
other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
Internal jumper groups
N/0V Supply
Valve
Cablage
6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27 X1 Connector
One output group SCS² Internal

11 12 10 9
9 REV 3
I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state
interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage
range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output
modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS² cover. The
cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside.
LED
FUSE
Application
ABE (Application Builder Environment)
System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is
the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the
software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and
these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some
properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
In the system view we have to activate

the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is
the master and is active per default.
System properties
Menu tabs
10 REV 3
Pin configuration
Next menu tab is “pin configuration”, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1)
Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name ”switch”.
(2) Comment field is optional. (3)
Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name
”VALVE”. (2)
Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any
of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use “_”.
A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.
Component view
Next menu tab is the “component view”
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette
displaying all components is available in the view.
The palette can be made visible
by pressing “components” if it is
not already visible.
Available
component
pallet
11 REV 3
Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet
(1). It’s located in the Digital tab (2).
Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the
right button to get the arrow back.
Right click the mouse on

the left red dot and work
your way to the input
”SWITCH” and left click.
Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case “VALVE”
12 REV 3
Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select “properties”.
Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal
component address and should not be changed. When ready press “OK”.
Instance name
Delay time
If the application needs to be When the application is ready

saved before it is ready choose choose “Compile”. The file will
“Save”. The file will be stored as then be saved as a loadable file
a “spi” file. “spr” and is of curse editable.
13 REV 3
Load view
The last view is the “Load view”. From this view it is possible to download and up load
applications to and from a connected SCS² system. Press the “Download” button and a
dialogue box will appear, choose the desired “spr” file and press the “Open” button.
Download
Choose file
and press
open
Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar.

First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the
connected node bar as percent.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if
necessary).
When the download is ready
this dialogue box appears.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Total transfer
completed (%)
14 REV 3
Anybus
General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes,
but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced
with an Anybus
interface
Outside net
Slave (A1)
with anybus
SCS2
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
Input Output
Switch Valve
Connecting the B1 node

Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the
picture below
G roup used as Input G roup used as O utput
L /24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S² SC S²
1 2 3 4 9 SC S 11
10 12
44 31 41 43 42 8 26 16 6 7
I/O M oduls
15 REV 3
Connecting the A1 node
Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector.
An “Anybus card” is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital
I/Os are located.
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)

This card is used for translation
between different field buses and
a standardized format read by the
SCS² system.
There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector
for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification
of the unit in the outside net (3).
Item 3. HW address
1 2 3
1 2 *10 *1
4 3
The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the
Anybus-card and the outside net.
1:not used
2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus
3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus
4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows:
Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set
during configuration of the network.
Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.
16 REV 3
The Anybus card
is to be mounted
inside the hood on
the right upper
corner of the node
Connect an Anybus jumper

to the D-sub connector on
the Anybus card.
And connect to the outside
connector on the connection
rail beside the card.
On the connection rail the

wires from the D-sub should
be connected in the
following order from the
right 8 3 5 (for Profibus)
Fieldbus connector used for

connecting to the outside
interface.
17 REV 3
Application with a Anybus interface
ABE
Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the ”pin configuration” view
and remove the switch from A1, add a new “switch” to B1 in Port id# 1
Then get in to the “component view” and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector
(on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is
acquired for the component to function.
Get an “Input bit”(1) from the “available component”

menu under the “Anybus” tab (2) and place it out in front
of the “OD timer” and also take an “or” gate from “gates” 1 2
and a “split” from “digital”.
Connect the switch to the “split”, the “input bit” and the “split” to the “or” and the “or” to
the “OD timer”. Yore connection should now be as below.
Choose an “Output bit” and connect it to the “split”
Note: A red dot on any of the components

makes it impossible to compile the application.
18 REV 3
Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to
configure following.
“Note” is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
“Bit number” is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7)
“Byte number” is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63)
“Node” is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)
Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both
directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card
(outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than
in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.
19 REV 3
Anybus gateway
General
Compared to a conventional SCS² node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or
analogue I/O’s, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally
The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is
when the SCS² system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node)
on the crane PLC.
Status LEDs
Anybus card Power connector

(in this case
Profibus) BCAN connector
Node address key

switches
Serial port
connector
20 REV 3
BCAN - Status LEDs
There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status
and one red LED indicating error status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and
flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when
configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card)
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.
Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2- NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NUMBER
pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).
VCC 10 to 28 V DC 1
24Volt DC powers the node internally.
GND Ground 2
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-
NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NUMBER
pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in
the system have to be connected equal (bus CAN H CAN high 1
topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be CAN L CAN low 2
able to establish communication.
Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address. The node
identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the A1
conventional nodes.
For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane)

node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF.
Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set
DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.
A2
Serial port connector

The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a
computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS² nodes)
Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.
21 REV 3
APS
Absolute encoder on the telescope
General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and
channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the “analogue” tab, the RS485
port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to
be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this
is the “scale” component. The “scale” component is also located under the “analogue”
tab.
Teach is used Add the RS485 port component
for storing from the analogue tab
positions
The scale component
makes it possible to
translate the sensor
value to the
mechanical distance
The RS485 component

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle
some different types of protocol in this case “slin”.
The parameters:
Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the

component in the software to the correct hardware input,
choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is
wired to.
Protocol: it is possible to choose

between some different standardised
protocols to suit the sensor used.
When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture
for data)
Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting
to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary.
Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution.
Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.
22 REV 3
From bits to millimetres (scale)
Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single
twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a
note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same
procedure.
Note: It is very important that the sensor doesn’t wraparound (when counting up, after
the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the
expanded value should be larger.
Right click on the scale component and choose “properties”

And fill in the noted values as following.
The measured max
value in millimeters
The measured min
value in millimeters
The up loaded max value
from the ABE online
The up loaded min value
from the ABE online
Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare
with the scaled value.
Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function
called “TEACH”. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is
possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter “PWM value for
teach” in APS properties) to the required length, for position “20ft”, hold the teach
command and give the go to position “20ft” command. The value is now stored in the
spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions.
The connection point for teach
The connection points for position

direct commands
The connection points for expand/
retract commands
Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by
activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on
the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is
given at the same time that position is destroyed.
23 REV 3
External EE-prom
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock
counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system
without loosing this information.
Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following.
Name Pin number in Cable
connector
10V supply X2/36 Red
Serial data X2/16 Blue
Serial clock X2/26 Green
Signal ground X2/6 Black
The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS²
node within the cable range.
24 REV 3
Software
A “spreader properties” component needs to be added in the application, that make the
system try to find the “EE-prom” at boot.
The “spreader properties” component (1) is located in the “misc…” tab (2) in the
“available component” menu.
4
3
2 1
The “spreader properties” contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make
the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the
connection points on the left of the component (3).
The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net
(if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the
component (4).
25 REV 3
Activate the EE-prom
The EE-prom is activated after the “Serial number” value is set.
The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to.
Left click on the “Serial number” key in the BMS “spreader info” tab.
In the “current key” dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen “serial
number”.
Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the “set” button to store and
activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.
The “Spreader info” tag
The “get all” button
The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the
“spreader info” tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the “get all” button.
26 REV 3
User Manual
Version 1.03
Revision Issued by Date Measures

PA1 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems 2000-05-26 First draft.
PA2 Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip 2000-08-09 Corrections
PA3 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems 2000-10-10 More corrections
A GO, AL 2000-10-10 Version 1.0
PB1 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems 2001-01-22 PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd
changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set.
PB2 Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems 2002-06-04 Revision after system release 1.04
PB3 Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems 2003-06-10 Revision after system release 1.05
Printed: 03-10-16 10.51

Document: Project: Project No
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Research & Development

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 2(86)
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5
2 INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5
2.1 HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5
3 USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6

3.1 Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.2 Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.3 Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4 General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6

3.4.1 File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2 Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.4 Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.5 Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
4 SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9

4.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9

4.2.1 Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.2 Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.3 Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.4 Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5 Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.6 Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.7 Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.8 Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.9 Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10
5 PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11

5.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2.1 Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.2 Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11
5.2.3 Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
2(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 3(86)
6 COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................12

6.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 12
6.2 Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 13

6.2.1 Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 13
6.3 Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 13

6.3.1 Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 13
6.3.2 Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.3 Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 14
6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 14
6.3.5 Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 14
6.3.7 Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 14
7 LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................15
7.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 15
7.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 15
8 COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................16
8.1 Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 16
8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 16
8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 19
8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 23
8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 25
8.1.5 Tower – Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 28
8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 31
8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 35
8.1.8 Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 39
8.1.9 TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 41
8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 45
8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 49
8.2 AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 52

8.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 52
8.2.2 Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 53
8.2.3 Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 54
8.2.4 Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 54
8.2.5 Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 55
8.2.6 Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.7 Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.2.8 Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 56
8.3 Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 57

8.3.1 Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 57
8.3.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 57
8.3.3 Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.4 Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.4 Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 60

8.4.1 AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 60
8.4.2 NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 61
3(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 4(86)
8.4.3 NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 61
8.4.4 OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 62
8.4.5 NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 63
8.4.6 XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 63
8.4.7 SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.4.8 RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.4.9 Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 65
8.5 Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 65

8.5.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 65
8.5.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 66
8.5.3 OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 66
8.5.4 Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.5 Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 67
8.6 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 68

8.6.1 Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.6.2 Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.3 Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.4 Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 71
8.6.5 Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.6.6 Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7 Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 74
8.7.1 RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 74
8.7.2 IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 74
8.7.3 IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.4 IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.5 IN0 – IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.6 IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 76
8.7.7 Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 76
8.7.8 AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 77
8.7.9 Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 77
9 TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................79
4(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 5(86)
1 Introduction
ABE – Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the
Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and
programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface.
In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied
together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system
together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the
target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection.
The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic
Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter
settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader
experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM
(log).
This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of
the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to
logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.
2 Installing ABE
2.1 HW requirements
The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are:
• an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
• at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
• at least 2Mb of free disk space.
2.2 Installation
• Close any other applications running under windows.
• Insert the CD into your station.
• Run the file Setup.exe.
• Follow the instructions on the screen.
2.3 Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
5(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 6(86)
3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions.
This chapter describes the four main functions of the program.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.
3.1 Main window

The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the
four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations.
The application supports tool tips.
The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.
3.2 Error control

Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control
can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.
3.3 Multiple language support

The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.
3.4 General functions

The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.
3.4.1 File
Two types of files are available.
Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2.
Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but
want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.
3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.
3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.
3.4.1.3 Save As...

Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.
3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.
3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.
6(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 7(86)
3.4.2 Edit
3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.
3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.
3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses
will also be pasted into the page.
3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.
3.4.3 Settings
3.4.3.1 Error Control

Turns the error control on/off.
3.4.3.2 Show hints

Turns the tool tips on/off.
3.4.3.3 Show component connection info

Turns information at component connection points on/off.
3.4.4 Tools
3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view

Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation

Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.3 Export parameters

Exports the selected components parameters to a file.
3.4.4.4 Import parameters

Imports parameters from a file to current project.
3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks

Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder
look activated.
7(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 8(86)
3.4.5 Help
3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.
8(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 9(86)
4 System view
4.1 General
The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system
properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes
intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name
corresponds to a unique address key setting.
The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of
checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that
system. An exception is if the “EXISTS” function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input
on the master node.
The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and
seven spreader nodes are available for selection.
Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as “Spreader stop” have to be checked here as well if these
functions are used.
Figure 4:1 System view
4.2 Functionality
The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out
(topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and
Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key.
You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
The properties are:
4.2.1 Author
This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.2 Last date saved

Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
9(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 10(86)
4.2.3 Creation date

Displays the date of the current project’s creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project.
Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
4.2.4 Version number

A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.
4.2.5 Revision number

The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.
4.2.6 Spreader type

A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.7 Drawing number

A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.8 Customer
This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80
characters.
4.2.9 Comments
This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
10(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 11(86)
5 Pin configuration view
5.1 General
The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list
corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed.
A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red.
The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN,
OUT or NC (Not connected) and if it’s a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited.
Remark:
Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view
5.2 Functionality
This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each
individual I/O its’ nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments
to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the
component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit
I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of
groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.
5.2.1 Address key

The “address key” field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to
the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.
5.2.2 Exists port

The “exists port” is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input “replace” a node
within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active
in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of
Spreaders are to be used within the same system.
11(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 12(86)
5.2.3 Anybus I/O

With this button you can view all anybus inputs and outputs in current Spreader program.
6 Component view
6.1 General
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available
in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse.
Remark:
Figure 6:1 Component view Figure 6:2 Palette
Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.
12(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 13(86)
The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual.
Name Symbol Description

Output tag An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making
the program more readable and efficient.
Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed
by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s)
Input tag An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag.
Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be
followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag.
Component A component contains logic. The components range from
simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full
functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of
the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or
right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its’
properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A
component also carries component connection points (round
circles).
A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be
Component connection connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the
connection point is connected it turns white. This means that
it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white
although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.
Output port A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the

Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple
connections are not possible for an Output port.
Input port A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the
Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view.
Multiple connections A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with
two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind
the user that the Input port has been connected at least once
before.
Component connection Information about the generic name of the component
information connection is shown above each connection point when
turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the
Settings menu.
6.2 Page functionality

One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be
accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary.
The component view provides the following functionality:
6.2.1 Adding pages

By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.
6.3 Component functionality

In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:
6.3.1 Adding a component

This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and
then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page you’re working on.
13(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 14(86)
6.3.2 Moving a component

Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.
6.3.3 Selecting multiple components

Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).
6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components

The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same
application or in other ABE applications.
6.3.5 Delete a component

By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.
6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components

Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components.
One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists
displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags).
Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.
6.3.7 Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2.
Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button.
Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked
The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).
14(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 15(86)
7 Load view
7.1 General
The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is
selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the
three progress bars.
Figure 7:1 Load view
7.2 Functionality
When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a
compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is
shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of
the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.
15(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 16(86)
8 Components
Terminology:
In this section the follow terms are used:
False = 0 = logical low level
True = 1 = logical high level
Parameter – “Instance name”:

Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse
button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title “Instance
name”. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be
altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine
the interconnection between components.
State transition diagrams:

The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the
same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the
complete listing.
Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: “not All unlocked”
This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4).
The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand.
Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.
8.1 Controllers
8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4

The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the
Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection
of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it
also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.
8.1.1.1 State transition diagram

“Not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4
“Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
“Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).
LOCK_ALL:
Lock all Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock all Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.
16(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 17(86)
For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
LOCK_ALL
[ Lock after landed OR

(landed override AND
Lock) ]
[ not All unlocked ] [ All locked ]
[ Lock after landed OR [ Unlock after landed OR

STARTUP
(landed override AND (landed override AND
Lock) ] IDLE
Unlock) ]
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED
[ Unlock after landed

OR (landed override
AND Unlock) ]
UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4
8.1.1.2 Input ports
Input Type Description

Landed override Digital Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command Digital Unlock command to unlock all
Twistlocks.
Lock command Digital Lock command to lock all
Twistlocks.
17(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 18(86)
Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status

on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.
Locked 1,..., Locked 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
on locked sensor 1 to 4.
Landed 1,..., Landed 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
on landed sensor 1 to 4
8.1.1.3 Output ports
Output Type Description

Unlock Digital Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.
Lock Digital Lock signal to all Twistlocks.
Locked signal Digital All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal Digital All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal Digital All Twistlocks are landed.
8.1.1.4 Parameters
Parameter Unit Description

Delay Milliseconds Time after all landed sensors are true
[ms] and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked 1,...,
Locked 4 shall become true within
this time when a lock output has
gone high.)
Timeout landed Milliseconds Time from the first landed input has
[ms] gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging Digital If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.
8.1.1.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.
18(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 19(86)
Code Message Description

60 TLC_NO_SENSOR No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
61 TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
62 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
63 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.
64 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal
has not been received after output to valve.
65 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
66 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
67 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
118 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT When override input is set to true and
ED previous state is false.
119 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV When override input is set to false and
ATED previous state is true.
175 TLC_LOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock lock command received
176 TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock unlock command received
177 TLC_LOCKED All Twistlocks have been locked
178 TLC_UNLOCKED All Twistlocks have been unlocked
244 TLC_LANDED The spreader has been landed.
245 TLC_UNLANDED The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)
8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8

The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from
changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and
always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends
event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

Twin is down (two containers):
“not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8
Twin is up (single container):

“not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4
“Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
“Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
19(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 20(86)
STARTUP:
LOCK_ALL:
Lock single and twin Twistlocks.
LOCK_SINGLE:
Lock single Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock single and twin Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_SINGLE:
Unlock single Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.
For al l states: LOCK_ALL LOCK_SINGLE

T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enabl e = 0
[ T win is down ]
[ T win i s up ]
[ All locked ]
[ Al l locked ]
[ Unlock after landed OR

(l anded override AND
Unlock) ]
[ Unlock after landed
ST ART UP [ Lock after landed OR OR (landed override
[ Lock after landed OR
(landed overri de AND IDLE AND Unl ock) ]
(landed override AND
Lock) ] Lock) ]
enabl e = 1
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED [ All unlocked ]
[ T wi n is down ]
T win is up
UNLOCK_SINGLE
UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8
20(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 21(86)
8.1.2.2 Input ports

Landed override Digital Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Unlock command Digital Unlock command to unlock all
Twistlocks.
Lock command Digital Lock command to lock all
Twistlocks.
Twin unlocked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on unlocked sensor
Twin unlocked 4
Single unlocked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on unlocked sensor
Single unlocked 4
Twin locked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on locked sensor
Twin locked 4
Single locked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on locked sensor
Single locked 4
Twin landed 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on landed sensor
Twin landed 4
Single landed 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on landed sensor
Single landed 4
Twin is up Digital Input signal telling that Twinboxes
are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled
only.
TTDS Fault Digital Input signal telling that there is a
TTDS fault. Disables lock
operations.
21(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 22(86)
Unlock single Digital Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.

Unlock twin Digital Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Lock single Digital Lock signal to single Twistlocks.
Lock twin Digital Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Locked signal Digital All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal Digital All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal Digital All Twistlocks are landed.
8.1.2.4 Parameters

Delay Milliseconds Time after all landed sensors are true
[ms] and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked single 1,...,
Locked single 4 shall become true
within this time when a lock output
has gone high.)
Timeout landed Milliseconds Time from the first landed input has
[ms] gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging Digital If set to true (checked) the logging of

60 TLC_NO_SENSOR No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
61 TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
62 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
63 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Locked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all locked.
22(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 23(86)
64 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal

has not been received after output to valve.
65 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
66 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
67 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
118 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT When override input is set to true and
ED previous state is false.
119 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV When override input is set to false and
ATED previous state is true.
175 TLC_LOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock lock command received
176 TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock unlock command received
177 TLC_LOCKED All Twistlocks have been locked
178 TLC_UNLOCKED All Twistlocks have been unlocked
244 TLC_LANDED The spreader has been landed.
245 TLC_UNLANDED The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)
8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller

The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the
component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to
the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.
States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached.
UP:
All Flippers are sent up.
DOWN:
All Flippers are sent down.
23(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 24(86)
For all s tates :

UP
[ UpCom m and ]
START_UP IDLE
[ DownCom m and ]
DISABLED DOWN
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC
8.1.3.2 Input ports

Up command Digital Command to send all Flippers up.
Down command Digital Command to send all Flippers down.

Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n Digital Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n Digital Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
8.1.3.4 Parameters

Number of Flippers Number The number of Flippers to be
controlled.
24(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 25(86)
Operation mode Option Impulse (only impulse required for

the command to execute) or Constant
(constant command required).
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of


246 FAC_UP_COMMAND Flipper up command received
247 FAC_DOWN_COMMAND Flipper down command received
8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System

The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box
indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as
well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions
are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant
commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will
perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of
that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from
the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has
been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions aren’t reached within a parameter
adjusted time etc.
The DPS component is equipped with an “fast I/O concept”, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a
higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the
component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the
same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract).
If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the “fast I/O concept” will be disabled.
States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
EXPAND:
Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
RETRACT:
25(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 26(86)
Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
CONSTANT REPEAT:
When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must
be released before a new command will be excepted.
Example:
1. Expand command is given.
2. Next stop is reached.
3. The telescope stops.
4. Expand command is released.
5. New expand command is given.
6. The telescope continues.
DELAY:
A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in
Operation mode (parameter) else ignored.
“currentCommand” = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to
position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position
and desired position.
For all s tates :

[ desiredStop = currentStop, [ desiredStop = current

Operation m ode = Delay ] EXPAND Stop, Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]
[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]
[ Delay perform ed ] CONSTANT REPEAT

DELAY IDLE [ com m andInput =
NO_CMD ]
[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ]
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]
START_UP DISABLED
[ SpreaderStop = 0,
Enable = 1 ]
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS
8.1.4.2 Input ports
26(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 27(86)

Expand command Digital Input command to expand telescope
to next stop.
Retract command Digital Input command to retract telescope
to next stop.
Return to position 0 Digital Input command to expand telescope
… to predefined stop. The number of
Return to position n predefined stops is set by the
parameter Number of stops.
Sensor 0 Digital Sensor input.
...
Example with 4 stops:
Sensor n
Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1,
Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3,
Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5,
Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6.
Etc..
Any landed Digital Sensor input from landed sensors.
Prevents telescoping when landed.
All unlocked Digital Sensor input from unlocked sensors.
Permits telescoping when unlocked.
Slave Digital Enables slave mode. Telescope will
run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled

Expand Digital Output to expand telescope.
Retract Digital Output to retract telescope.
In position 0,..., Reached stop n Digital Output signal indicating that the
specific valid stop has been reached.
In position Digital Output signal indicating that a valid
stop has been reached.
8.1.4.4 Parameters
27(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 28(86)
Timeout Milliseconds Time permitted from when an output

[ms] is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Operation mode Option Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.
Delay at each stop Milliseconds Time the telescope is delayed
[ms] (stopped) at each stop.
Number of stops Number The number of stops in use.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the storing of
no generated messages will be stored.


68 DPS_TIMEOUT No valid stop reached within timeout
time.
69 DPS_SENSOR_MISSING The expected sensor has not been
reached within specified sequence.
70 DPS_SENSOR_LOST Position sensor has been lost without
any command given
71 DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR More than one position sensor active
simultaneously.
179 DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
180 DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
181 DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND A command to go to a certain
position received
182 DPS_STOP_REACHED A valid position has been reached
8.1.5 Tower – Head block

The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.
States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
FEED_LEFT:
28(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 29(86)
Feeds the Tower to the left.
FEED_RIGHT:
Feeds the Tower to the right.
CENTER:
Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true.
DELAY:
A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).
For all s tates :

FEED_LEFT FEED_RIGHT
[ Feed right ]
[ Feed left ]
START_UP IDLE
[ Center ]
[ Delay perform ed ]
DISABLED
CENTER DELAY
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower
8.1.5.2 Input ports

Enable right Digital Enables feeding in right direction.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Enable left Digital Enables feeding in left direction.
(i.e. no effect).
Right end sensor Digital Position sensor input.
At right sensor Digital Position sensor input.
29(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 30(86)
At left sensor Digital Position sensor input.

Left end sensor Digital Position sensor input.
Right command Digital Input command to feed head block
right.
Left command Digital Input command to feed head block
left.
Centre command Digital Input command to feed head to the
centre position.

In centre Digital Output signal telling Head block is in
centre position.
At right side Digital Output signal telling Head block is to
the right.
At left side Digital Output signal telling Head block is to
the left.
Feed right Digital Output signal to feed Head block
right.
Feed left Digital Output signal to feed Head block left.
8.1.5.4 Parameters

Operation mode Option Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only
valid for the Centre command
Delay Milliseconds Time before a change of direction
[ms] will take effect.
Timeout Milliseconds Time permitted from when an output
[ms] is turned on until a valid position
exceeded the motion will be stopped.
Use end stops Option If set true (checked) Right end sensor
and Left end sensor does not need to
be connected.

30(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 31(86)

325 TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND Centre command is given.
326 TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND Feed left command is given.
327 TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND Feed right command is given.
328 TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS Tower has reached centre position.
329 TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS Tower has reached left position.
330 TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS Tower has reached right position.
369 TOWER_TIMEOUT Tower has not reached the desired
position within the time limit.
8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System

The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the
chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is
possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be
used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract
commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter
as well as are certain parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The
absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.
States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands telescope.
PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
RETRACT:
Retracts telescope.
PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
DELAY:
Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter)
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
31(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 32(86)
CONSTANT_REPEAT:
A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode
(parameter).
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
For all s tates :

EXPAND [ Operation m ode = Delay ] DELAY
[ desiredPos ition >

currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode = [ Operation m ode = Delay,

Im puls e, des iredPosition des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
= currentPos ition ]
[ Delay perform ed ]
STARTUP IDLE
[ no button is pres s ed ]
[ Operation m ode = Im puls e,

des iredPos ition = current
Pos ition ] [ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat,
des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition <
currentPos ition ]
DISABLED [ Operation m ode =

RETRACT Cons tant repeat ] CONSTANT REPEAT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS
8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions

This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach
input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the
encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops,
have to be taught a value.
8.1.6.3 Input ports
32(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 33(86)

Teach Digital Command to teach in new positions.
When this signal is true any Go
position command will store a new
position for corresponding stop.
Slave mode Digital Enables slave mode. Telescope will
run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled.
Hooks are up Digital Input signal indicating that all hooks
are in up position. Only used for twin
telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is
connected here telescoping is
permitted, can also be used as a
general permit.
Any landed Digital Input result from landed sensors.
Go position 0 Digital Command to feed to defined
… positions 0,...,n.
Go position n
Retract command Digital Command to retract telescope.
Expand command Digital Command to expand telescope.
Current position Analogue Scaled input signal of the current
position.

Stop position0 Analogue Output signal indicating the stored
… positions for the corresponding stop.
Stop position n
In position Digital Output signal indicating that a valid
stop has been reached.
In position 0 Digital Output signal indicating that the
… specific valid stop has been reached.
In position n
PWM retract PWM PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
PWM expand PWM PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
Digital retract Digital Digital output to control the
telescope.
33(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 34(86)
Digital expand Digital Digital output to control the

telescope.
Digital high speed Digital Digital output for high speed
telescoping in two-speed system.
8.1.6.5 Parameters

Delay at each stop Milliseconds Delay time at each stop if Expand or
[ms] Retract command is given and Delay
is enabled under Operation mode.
Timeout Milliseconds Time until from when an output is
[ms] turned on until a valid position
Number of stops Number The number of stops enabled.
Auto correction Option If enabled the APS will feed back the
telescope to its original position if it
of some reason has got out of
position.
Operation mode Option Impulse: sequence completes until a
new command is given
Delay: delay at each stop
Constant repeat: when a stop is
reached a new expand or retract
command must be given.
Stop window Millimetre Distance from defined stop to be
considered as a stop.
[mm]
Signal window Millimetre Window around the desired position
[mm] in which a signal indicating that the
correct position has been reached is
given.
Impact range Millimetre Hysterisis for impact detection.
[mm]
Impact off delay timer Milliseconds Delay after impact detected to run.
[ms]
Length of travel Millimetre Distance between minimum and
maximum positions.
[mm]
Time of telescope Milliseconds Time between minimum and
maximum positions.
[ms]
Ramp Gain Number Ramp gain.
[value *1000]
34(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 35(86)
Ramp offset Millimetre Ramp offset for stop speed

[mm]
Time to reach max speed Milliseconds The time it shall take to reach max
speed.
[ms]
Proportional Gain Number Proportional part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
Integral Gain Number Integral part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
PWM value for teach Number PWM output when teach enabled.
Reverse Min PWM output Number Minimum value on PWM that causes
a reversed movement.
Reverse Max PWM output Number Maximum value on PWM that causes
a reversed movement
Forward Min PWM output Number Minimum value on PWM that causes
a forward movement.
Forward Max PWM output Number Maximum value on PWM that causes
a forward movement.

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

183 APS_TIMEOUT The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time
limit.
184 APS_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
185 APS_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
186 APS_GOPOS_COMMAND Command to go to a specific position received
187 APS_STOP_REACHED The desired position reached
272 APS_TEACH_COMMAND Teach in command received
396 APS_IMPACT_ON Impact is detected
397 APS_AUTOCORR_ON Spreader is auto correcting
398 APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T The position value is not within the teached range.
EACH_RANGE
399 APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_ Spreader is bumped out of signal window.
WIN
8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system

The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin
telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to
return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has
35(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 36(86)
the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a
command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.
States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
For all s tates :

RETRACT
[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
STARTUP IDLE
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
EXPAND
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS
36(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 37(86)
8.1.7.2 Input ports

Current position Analogue Scaled input signal reading the
current position.
Return to predefined position 0 Digital Command to feed Twin boxes to
... predefined position 0,...,n
Return to predefined position n
Returned to stored position 0 Digital Command to feed Twin boxes to

... logged position 0,...,n
Returned to stored position n
Store new position 0 Digital Command to log new positions.
... When this signal is true the current
Store new position n position will be stored in the RAM of
the SCS2.
Teach Digital Command to teach in new positions.
When this signal is true any Go to
pre-defined position command will
store a new position for
corresponding stop.

Current reference position Analogue Signal indicating the currently
desired position.
Predefined position 0 Analogue Signal indicating the positions for the
… corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position n
Predefined position 0 Analogue Signal indicating the positions for the
… corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position n
Logged position 0 Analogue Output signal indicating the positions
… for the corresponding logged stop.
Logged position n
In position Digital Output signal indicating that any
position has been reached & logged
or predefined).
Expand Digital Output signal to expand Twin boxes.
Retract Digital Output signal to retract Twin boxes.
37(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 38(86)
8.1.7.4 Parameters

Stop window Millimetre Offset from stop to be considered as
[mm] a stop.
Operation mode Option Impulse: sequence completes until a
new command is given
Constant: when a stop is reached a
new expand or retract command must
be given.
Predefined positions Number The number of stops that will be
stored in none volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be available after
shutting down system.)
Storable positions Number The number of stops that will be
stored in volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be lost when shutting
down system.)
Timeout Milliseconds Time from when an output is turned
[ms] on until a valid position should be
reached. If this time is exceeded the
motion will be stopped and a warning
generated.

box Enable logging.

281 MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS Teach command received.
282 MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS Command to go to a pre-defined position has
been received.
280 MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS A command to store a new value for a log
position has been received.
284 MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS A command to return to a log position has been
received.
285 MPS_TIMEOUT The twin-legs haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.
38(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 39(86)
8.1.8 Twin Telescope

The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs.
The component, although it doesn’t hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.
States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false.
Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right
sensor is false.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.
For all s tates :

EXPAND
[ Expand, !in45Pos ]
[ !Expand OR in45Pos ]
STARTUP IDLE
[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in

[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ] ZeroPos Right) ]
[ Retract, !inZeroPos Left,

!inZeroPos Right ]
DISABLED RETRACT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope
39(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 40(86)
8.1.8.2 Input ports

In 45ft Digital Sensor input signal.
In zero right Digital Sensor input signal.
In zero left Digital Sensor input signal.
Retract command Digital Command input to retract the twin
boxes.
Expand command Digital Command input to expand the twin
boxes.

Retract Digital Output signal to retract twin boxes.
Expand Digital Output signal to expand twin boxes.
8.1.8.4 Parameters

Timeout Milliseconds Time until from when an output is
[ms] turned on until a valid position

box Enable logging.

273 TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
274 TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
275 TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT Left console reached zero gap position
276 TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT Right console reached zero gap position
40(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 41(86)
277 TWINTELE_EXPANDING Twinlegs expand in motion
278 TWINTELE_RETRACTING Twinlegs retract in motion

279 TWINTELE_TIMEOUT Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion
within time limit
8.1.9 TwinUpDown
The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin
up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down
consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks
situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the
hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until
the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are
fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output “ Twin up ready pulse ”,
which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.
41(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 42(86)
TWIN_UP TWIN_DOWN
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft 2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook [ twinDownReques tM ]
Disconnected || !hookRight LeftDis connected &&
Disconnected ] RAISE_BOXES
hookRightDis connected) ]
CONNECT
[ !allTwinUp ] [ allTwinUp ]
[ hookLeftConnected && hook

1 : [ !allTwinUp || RightConnected ]
!hookLeftDis connected
RAISE_HOOKS || !hookRight
Disconnected ]
[ hookLeftDis connected &&

hookRightDis connected ] BOXES_DOWN
2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left
&& twinInZeroPosRight) ] INCH_IN
2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF

_DELAY_INCH && twinInZero [ anyTwinUp ] [ !anyTwinUp ]
Pos Left && twinInZeroPos
Right && energis eInchInM ]
3:
HOLD_DOWN
HOLD_UP
OFF_DELAY_INCH
1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn
ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ]
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if Trans ition to IDLE s tate if
twinDownCom m and twinUpCom m and
H* H*
[ twinUpCom m and ]
[ twinDownCom m and ] 1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin

DownCom m and && hookLeft
Connected && hookRightConnected ]
IDLE
2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook
LeftConnected && hook 2 : [ twinUpReques tM ] 1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook
RightConnected) ] LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected ]
3:
STARTUP
For all s tates :

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] DISABLED
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown
42(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 43(86)
8.1.9.2 Input ports

Twin box up 1 Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
… boxes are up.
Twin box up 4
Hook connected right Digital Sensor input indicating that right
hook is down.
Hook connected left Digital Sensor input indicating that left hook
is down.
Right attach permit Digital Sensor input indicating that position
has been reached to attach twin boxes
on right side.
Left attach permit Digital Sensor input indicating that position
has been reached to attach twin boxes
on left side.
Hook disconnected right Digital Sensor input indicating that hook is
up on right side.
Hook disconnected left Digital Sensor input indicating that hook is
up on left side.
Twin in zero right Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
boxes has reached zero position on
right side.
Twin in zero left Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
boxes has reached zero position on
left side.
Chain in 40ft Digital Sensor input indicating that chain is
in 40ft position.
Permit twin down Digital Permits down motion if set to true.
Permit twin up Digital Permits up motion if set to true.
Twin down command Digital Command to send Twin boxes down.
Twin up command Digital Command to send Twin boxes up.
8.1.9.3 Output port

Twin up ready pulse Digital Signal telling that up sequence is
completed.
Twin down Digital Signal to lower Twin boxes.
Twin up Digital Signal to raise Twin boxes.
43(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 44(86)
Disconnect twin unit left Digital Signal to disconnect left hook.

Disconnect twin unit right Digital Signal to disconnect right hook.
Connect twin unit left Digital Signal to connect left hook.
Connect twin unit right Digital Signal to connect right hook.
Inch to zero gap Digital Signal to inch in Twin boxes.
Inch to connect left Digital Signal to inch out left Twin box.
Inch to connect right Digital Signal to inch out right Twin box.
8.1.9.4 Parameters

Timeout Twin down Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Timeout hook Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
complete.
Timeout Twin inching Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
complete.

box Enable logging.

255 TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT Twin boxes have failed to get to their
upper position within time limit.
256 TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT Left hook has failed to reach its' upper
257 TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT Right hook has failed to reach its' upper
258 TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT Twin boxes left timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
259 TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT Twin-boxes right timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
260 TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT Left hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
261 TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT Right hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
44(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 45(86)
262 TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT Twin-boxes have failed to get to their

lower position within time limit.
263 TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not
due to output).
264 TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST Twin up sensor received when twin-
boxes are down.
265 TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST Left hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
266 TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST Right hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
267 TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
268 TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
286 TWIN_UP_COMMAND Twin up command has been received.
287 TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND Twin down command has been received.
288 TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP Twin boxes have reached their upper
position.
289 TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN Twin boxes have reached their lower
position.
8.1.10 PID
8.1.10.1 Overview
The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders
with special requirements.
Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed.
The PID component have the following features:
Position control
Velocity control
Syncronisation of two cylinders
Acceleration limitation
These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5.
The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.
8.1.10.2 Position control

The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position
mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with
configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The position mode can be activated in run time.
8.1.10.3 Velocity control

In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range –100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then
moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as
fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The velocity mode can be activated in run time.
When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.
8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders

Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in
the PID to handle this.
45(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 46(86)
There are two different kind of syncronisation modes:

Parallel sync
Non-parallel sync
Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position
between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode.
Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means
that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions
during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions.
In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position.
You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.
8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation

Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an Acceleration limiter is
installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation.
The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.
8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used.
Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify
the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively.
When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.10.7 Input Ports

Enable Digital Enables regulator if set true.
Regulator mode Digital Sets the operational mode,
POSITION (Low level, 0) or
VELOCITY (High level, 1).
Sync parallel mode Digital
Synchronise Digital
Reference value Analogue Reference value. This signal is scaled

within the component and must not
be pre-scaled or scaled to desired
value.
(Port not visible in ABE)

Sensor value Analogue Depending on regulator index the
sensor signal will be read from either
analogue input 0 or analogue input 1.
This signal is scaled within the
component and must not be pre-
scaled.
8.1.10.8 Output Ports
46(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 47(86)

Retract output (PWM) Analogue The actual value sent to the PWM
when retracting.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Expand output (PWM) Analogue The actual value sent to the PWM
when expanding.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Retracting Digital This signal indicates that the
regulator is retracting.
Expanding Digital This signal indicates that the
regulator is expanding.
(Ports not visible in ABE)

PWM 0 Analogue Used for forward output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 1 Analogue Used for reverse output (PID 0 which
PWM 2 Analogue Used for forward output (PID 1 which
PWM 3 Analogue Used for reverse output (PID 1 which
8.1.10.9 Parameters

Filter weight Percent The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
[%]
Aim window Millimetres The distance from the reference
position where to aim for the non-
[mm]
linear regulator. It is only used in
Position mode.
Rate limiter gain Number This should be the frequency [Hz],
i.e. 1/sample interval.
Fraction of square root Percent Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 60-
[%]
90.
47(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 48(86)
Switch window Millimetres Distance from reference position

where to switch from the non linear
[mm]
regulator to the PI regulator. This
parameter must be higher than the
Aim window parameter. It is only
used in Position mode.
Time to reach input Milliseconds Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
[ms]
mode.
Sync max integrator Percent Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
[%]
Sync Integral (I) Number Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync Proportional (P) Number Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sample interval Milliseconds Sampling interval.
[ms]
Velocity window Percent When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
[%]
window it is interpreted as zero.
Position window Millimetres When regulating position the
cylinder will stop when it reaches
[mm]
reference position +/- Position
window.
Device length Millimetres Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
[mm]
Insignal max Number Maximum insignal from analogue
input.
Insignal min Number Minimum insignal from analogue
input.
R Half PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between
[ms] Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.
R Max PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between
[ms] Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.
R Min PWM Number Minimum PWM output that causes
movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
R Half PWM Number PWM output between R Min PWM
and R Max PWM.
Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max
PWM) / 2
R Max PWM Number Minimum PWM output at max
speed. (Upper threshold limit).
48(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 49(86)
F Half PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between 0

[ms] and Device length at F Half PWM.
F Max PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between 0
[ms] and Device length at F Max PWM.
F Min PWM Number Minimum PWM output that causes
movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
F Half PWM Number PWM output between F Min PWM
and F Max PWM.
Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max
PWM) / 2
F Max PWM Number Minimum PWM output at max
speed. (Upper threshold limit).
Pos. Integral (I) Number Integral part of PI regulator. Only
used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Pos. Proportional (P) Number Proportional part of PI regulator.
Only used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Acceleration limit Milliseconds Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
[ms]
Regulator index Number Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
Node Option Location of regulator. Choose
between B1 – B8 and A1 – A4.
Store mode Option Select which parameters to use:
ALL PARAMS: use all parameters
from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
REGULATOR PARAMS: use only
the regulator parameters from
NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear
parameters from NVRAM stored by
AutoTuner
ABE ONLY: use parameters only
from Spreader program file
8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and
measuring it’s characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID
components, it’s possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check
box Prepare for sync parameter.
49(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 50(86)
The AutoTuner will store it’s measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and
monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is
supposed to use the auto tuned parameters.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.11.1 Input ports

Enable Digital Enables component if set true. When
the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the
auto tune procedure is restarted.
Slave Analogue Sensor input signal for the slave
cylinder. Only needed if prepare for
sync is checked.
Main Analogue Sensor input signal for the cylinder to
auto tune.

Finished Digital Output for telling when tuning is
complete.
Slave Retract Analogue Output for retracting slave cylinder.
Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Slave Expand Analogue Output for expanding slave cylinder.
Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Main Retract Analogue Output for retracting main cylinder.
This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Main Expand Analogue Output for expanding main cylinder.
This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
8.1.11.3 Parameters
50(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 51(86)
Position window Millimeter When regulating position the

cylinder will stop when it reaches
[mm]
reference position +/- Position
window.
Velocity window Percents When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
[%]
window it is interpreted as zero.
Sync Proportional [P] Number Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync Integral [I] Number Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync max integrator Percents Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
[%]
Time to reach input Milliseconds Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
[ms]
mode.
Fraction of square root Percents Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 60-
[%]
90.
Filter weight Percents The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
[%]
Natural frequency Number
[value * 1000]
Moderation factor Number
[value * 1000]
Regulator index Number Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
Sample interval Milliseconds Sampling interval.
[ms]
Acceleration limit Milliseconds Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
[ms]
Device length Millimetre Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
[mm]
Timeout Milliseconds Timeout for a full cylinder stroke.
This parameter must be greater than
[ms]
the tiem it takes for the cylinder to
perform a full stroke.
Record name Text The instance name of the matching
PID component.
51(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 52(86)
Prepare for sync Option This shall be enabled when using

syncronisation between two
cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder
to the slower one.

fault and event log onboard the SCS2.

385 AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM The component has stored it’s
parameters in NVRAM.
8.2 AnyBus
8.2.1 Introduction
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O
OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics
are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard
display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for
52(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 53(86)
indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and
therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic
message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.
8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.

The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)
8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0 => Node ID
Byte 1-2 (WORD) => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD) => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 9-10 (WORD) => Sequential counter
The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
8.2.2 Anybus System

The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr).
Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.
8.2.2.1 Input ports

Download start Digital If set true, component expects
download data on Anybus.
8.2.2.2 Parameters
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.
Log active Option Indicates if the log should be
exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
53(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 54(86)
Log address 0-63 The Anybus output address in the

access area where the log should be
exported.
Assert active Option Indicates if the assert log should be
exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
Assert address 0-63 The Anybus output address in the
access area where the assert log
should be exported.
8.2.3 Output Word
8.2.3.1 Input ports

IN Analogue Input from analogue input port.
8.2.3.2 Parameters

Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number Number Word in Anybus interface to which
the value from ”IN” is to be
transferred to.
8.2.4 Output Byte
8.2.4.1 Input ports

IN Analogue Input from analogue input port.
8.2.4.2 Parameters

54(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 55(86)
Byte number Number Byte in Anybus interface to which

the value from ”IN” is to be
transferred to.
8.2.5 Output Bit
8.2.5.1 Input ports

IN Digital Input from digital input port.
8.2.5.2 Parameters

Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number Number Bit number of the chosen byte in
Anybus interface.
8.2.6 Input Word

OUT Analogue The word number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the “OUT” value.
8.2.6.2 Parameters

Word number Analogue The word within the Anybus
interface from which
55(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 56(86)

8.2.7 Input Byte

OUT Analogue The byte number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the “OUT” value.
8.2.7.2 Parameters

8.2.8 Input Bit

OUT Digital Digital value from Anybus interface.
8.2.8.2 Parameters

Bit number Number Bit number in Anybus interface.
56(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 57(86)
8.3 Guards
8.3.1 Spreader stop

The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them
to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log
8.3.1.1 Input ports

IN Digital Command to stop spreader.
true = spreader stops
false = spreader stop resumed
8.3.1.2 Parameters


box Enable logging

97 SPREADER_STOP Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated.
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.
8.3.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System

The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting
two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful
lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output
can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is
designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an
override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS
component generates log messages every time an override has been used.
8.3.2.1 Input ports

Override Digital Overrides TTDS result.
true = output (Twin) is always false
false = normal output
57(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 58(86)
Sensor 1 Digital Input from TTDS sensors.

...
Sensor 7

OUT Digital true = two containers detected
false = one or none detected

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
box Enable logging.

290 TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED Override request received.
291 TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED Override request ended.
8.3.3 Analogue guard

The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values
can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9)
unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 – 155 within the log system. Apart from sending
a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the
parameters of the component.
8.3.3.1 Input ports

IN Analogue Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

OUT Digital Signal indicating that Analogue input
has gone outside lower or upper limit
longer than the specified time Delay.
8.3.3.3 Parameters
58(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 59(86)
Note Text Descriptive string indicating the

function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Delay Milliseconds Time until warning message is
[ms] prompted if Analogue input has gone
out of boundaries.
Lower limit Number Lower limit of allowable input range.
Upper limit Number Upper limit of allowable input range.
Warning code Option Warning code that will identify the
component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)

box Enable logging.

146 USERDEFINED_0 User chooses what message to use. The messages
… ... generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read
155 USERDEFINED_9 out of the log.
8.3.4 Digital guard

The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.
8.3.4.1 Input ports

IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
8.3.4.2 Parameters

Note Text Descriptive string indicating the
function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Input NO/NC Option Normally open or normally closed
behaviour on input.
59(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 60(86)
Delay Milliseconds Time until warning message is

[ms] prompted if digital value is true or
false (depending on input NO / NC
setting).
Warning code Option Warning code that will identify the
component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)

box Enable logging.

146 USERDEFINED_0 User chooses what message to use. The messages generated
… ... in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
155 USERDEFINED_9
8.4 Gates
This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.
8.4.1 AND
This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
8.4.1.1 Input ports

IN0 Digital Digital value from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

OUT Digital Digital output result from AND
operation.
60(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 61(86)
8.4.1.3 Parameters

Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.
8.4.2 NAND
This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
8.4.2.1 Input ports

IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
IN n

OUT Digital Digital output result from NAND
operation.
8.4.2.3 Parameters

8.4.3 NOR
This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
61(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 62(86)
8.4.3.1 Input ports

IN n

OUT Digital Digital output result from NOR
operation.
8.4.3.3 Parameters

8.4.4 OR
This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
8.4.4.1 Input ports

IN n

OUT Digital Digital output result from OR
operation.
62(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 63(86)
8.4.4.3 Parameters

8.4.5 NOT
This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN OUT
0 1
1 0
8.4.5.1 Input ports


OUT Digital Digital output result from NOT
operation.
8.4.6 XOR
This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the
parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
8.4.6.1 Input ports

IN 0 Digital Digital value from other component
IN 1 Digital Digital value from other component
63(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 64(86)

OUT Digital Digital output result from XOR
operation.
8.4.7 SR Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).
8.4.7.1 Input ports

Set Digital Digital value from other component
Reset Digital Digital value from other component

OUT Digital Digital output result from SR latch.
8.4.8 RS Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).
8.4.8.1 Input ports

Set Digital Digital value from other component
Reset Digital Digital value from other component

Result Digital Digital output result from RS latch.
64(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 65(86)
8.4.9 Logical gate

The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values.
Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.
8.4.9.1 Input ports

component will set Result to zero.
(i.e. enabled all time).
IN 1 Analogue Input value 1.
IN 2 Analogue Input value 2.

Result Analogue Result of logical operation.
8.4.9.3 Parameters

Operation mode Option Determents type of logical operation
preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The
operations available are AND, OR
and XOR.
8.5 Digital
8.5.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer

The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.
8.5.1.1 Input ports

or digital input port. Starts the timer
on positive flank.
65(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 66(86)
OUT Digital Digital output that goes high if the

input is high and the specified time
has elapsed.
8.5.1.3 Parameters

Delay Milliseconds Time that the in put signal is to be
[ms] delayed before the output goes high
8.5.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter

The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN
input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero.
The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).
8.5.2.1 Input ports

Up Digital Increments the counter value
Down Digital Decrements the counter value
Reset Digital Sets the counter value to zero

OUT Digital OUT = 1 (high) when the counter
value is equal to or above the
specified value in the parameter
listing
Counter value Analogue The current value of the counter
8.5.2.3 Parameters

Trigger count Digital The counter value when the digital
output goes high. The output is on
when the counter value is equal to or
above this value.
8.5.3 OSC - Oscillator

The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.
8.5.3.1 Input ports
66(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 67(86)


OUT Digital Clock pulse output.
8.5.3.3 Parameters

Cycle time Milliseconds Cycle time for Clock output.
[ms]
8.5.4 Split
The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in
many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the
same.
8.5.4.1 Input ports


OUT 0 Digital Outputs have same status as the IN
… input port
OUT n
8.5.4.3 Parameters

Number of outputs Number Number of outputs on component.
8.5.5 Pulse
The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged
on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse.
An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.
67(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 68(86)
8.5.5.1 Input ports

Input Digital Trigger for starting pulse.

Time remaining Analogue Time remaining (ms) until pulse is
unlit.
Output Digital Pulse output.
8.5.5.3 Parameters

Active flank Option Determines active flank of trigger,
POS or NEG.
Length of pulse Milliseconds Duration of pulse.
[ms]
8.6 Miscellaneous
8.6.1 Constant
The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note
that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

Digital Digital Constant value > 0 : Digital output
= true
Constant value = 0 : Digital output
= false
Analogue Analogue Analogue output = Constant value
8.6.1.2 Parameters
68(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 69(86)
Value Number Value to put on output ports.
8.6.2 Dead end

The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be
used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that
signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one
doesn’t want the logic to control the outputs.

Digital IN Digital Terminates a digital connection.
Analogue IN Analogue Terminates an analogue connection.
8.6.3 Spreader properties
8.6.3.1 Input ports

Twin boxes are down Digital Input port telling that twin boxes are
down.
Landed Digital Input port telling that spreader has
landed.
Locked Digital Input port telling that all Twist locks
are locked.
Unlocked Digital Input port telling that all Twist locks
is unlocked.
Pump 1 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 1. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 1
counts.
counts.
counts.
69(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 70(86)
Number of lock operations on twin Analogue Number of lock operations

performed on twin Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of lock operations on single Analogue Number of lock operations
performed on single Twist locks.
Number of containers Analogue Number of containers handled. When
twin is down this number is
incremented by two. Saved in
external EEPROM.
Spreader serial number Analogue Spreader unique number. User
defined. Read from external
EEPROM.
Drawing number Analogue Spreader unique number. User
defined. Read from parameter
Drawing number.
Counter clock pulse Digital Clock pulse that toggles from false to
true when container is handled.
When a new sequence is ended
output goes back to false.
Drive time 1 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Drive time 1 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
where this output is the low word.
70(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 71(86)

8.6.3.3 Parameters

Drawing number Number User defined number. Number is
used to present the drawing number
of the spreader.

box Enable logging.

318 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E Last saved properties are read from
EPROM EEPROM.
319 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D System has read properties from NVRAM.
S
320 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF Spreader properties read from EEPROM
and NVRAM differ.
321 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP System succeeded to write properties to
ROM_OK EEPROM.
322 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP System failed to write properties to
ROM_FAIL EEPROM.
323 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N System detected that a new node is
ODE_TO_EEPROM connected since last shut down.
8.6.4 Memory
The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.
8.6.4.1 Input ports
71(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 72(86)

component will set the Analogue
OUT to zero. Default value if not
connected is true (i.e. no effect).
Write Digital If set true, component reads
Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.
Read Digital If set true, component reads from
NVRAM and writes to Analogue
OUT.
Analogue IN Analogue Analoge value that is to be stored.

Analogue OUT Analogue Value stored in NVRAM.
8.6.5 Digital buffer

The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
8.6.5.1 Input ports

Digital IN Digital Digital value that is to be buffered.

OUT 0 Digital Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
..
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
OUT n next cycle and so on.
8.6.5.3 Parameters

Number of samples to hold Number Number of cycles to remember.
8.6.6 Analogue buffer

The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
72(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 73(86)
8.6.6.1 Input ports

zero. Default value if not connected
Analogue IN Analogue Analogue value that is to be buffered.

OUT 0 Analogue Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
..
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
OUT n next cycle and so on.
8.6.6.3 Parameters

Number of samples to hold Number Number of cycles to remember.
73(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 74(86)
8.7 Analogue
The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.
8.7.1 RS485 port

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view
the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

OUT Analogue Analogue value of output from
sensor
8.7.1.2 Parameters

Protocol Option Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor
specific protocol). Only SLIN is
implemented SSI is implemeted.
Node Option Node the RS485 sensor is connected
to.
Code Type Option Applys only if SSI protocol is
selected
Input resolution Number Applys only if SSI protocol is
selected. Specifies the resolution of
the component.
8.7.2 IN0 > IN1
8.7.2.1 Input ports

IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

OUT Digital IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1
IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0
74(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 75(86)
8.7.3 IN0 * IN1
8.7.3.1 Input ports

IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 * IN 1
8.7.4 IN0 / IN1

Note. Always avoid division by zero.
8.7.4.1 Input ports

IN 0 Analogue Nominator input
IN 1 Analogue Denominator input

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 / IN 1
8.7.5 IN0 – IN1
8.7.5.1 Input ports

IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 – IN 1
75(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 76(86)
8.7.6 IN0 + IN1
8.7.6.1 Input ports

IN 0 Analogue Inputs to be added together
...
IN n

OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, …,+ IN n
8.7.6.3 Parameters

Input counter Number Number of input ports on component.
8.7.7 Scale
The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula,
OUT = ((scaledMax – scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin,
which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.
8.7.7.1 Input ports

IN Analogue Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

OUT Analogue Scaled analogue value with
constraints from parameter listing.
8.7.7.3 Parameters

Max value after scale Number Largest scaled value.
Min value after scale Number Smallest scaled value.
76(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 77(86)
Max value of input Number The maximum value of input.

Min value of input Number The minimum value of input.
8.7.8 AnalogueLatch
The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an
internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is
directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the
current value until a new digital command is given.
8.7.8.1 Input ports

IN Digital Input that trigger the component to
read the value IN Value.
IN Value Analogue Input value that is read and stored in
the component

OUT Analogue The stored value of the component
8.7.9 Filter
The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.
8.7.9.1 Input ports

Analogue IN Analogue Unfiltered signal.

Analogue OUT Analogue Filtered signal.
77(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 78(86)
8.7.9.3 Parameters

Filter type Option Determines type of filter. Only
MOVING AVR is implemented.
Filter weight Number [%] Determents how many percents of
previous filtered signal that is to be
used.
8.7.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.

Port 5 Analogue Analogue value
Port 4 Analogue Analogue value
8.7.10.2 Parameters

Node Option Specifies the node.
78(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 79(86)
8.7.11 Tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE.
Steps covered in this tutorial.
Creating a new project
System view
Pin configuration
Component view
Load view
Step 1: Creating a new project

Start ABE from your Start menu if it isn’t already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for
you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.
Figure 0:1 Create project
Step 2: System view

Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.
Figure 0:2 Activating nodes
Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.
Figure 0:3 Setting system parameters
79(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 80(86)
Step 3: Pin configuration

All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the
following names. Comment field is optional.
Figure 0:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1
Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4.
Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.
Figure 0:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2
Step 4: Component view

Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.
Figure 0:6 Choosing component
If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.
80(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 81(86)
Figure 0:7 Bringing up Available components
Place the component on Page 1 in the view.
Figure 0:8 Default look of FAC component
Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that
they are optional to connect.
Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.
Figure 0:9 Changing properties for FAC component
81(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 82(86)
The new appearance for the component should look like this:
Figure 0:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers
By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about
the properties for the component or its connection.
Figure 0:11 Look of component hint
Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as
shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.
Figure 0:12 Making component connections
82(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 83(86)
Your component should now look like this:
Figure 0:13 Appearance of a connection
Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected.
If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect
when it appears.
When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item
identifiers in the Pin configuration view.
Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.
Figure 0:14 Appearance of a connection
Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu.
If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item
identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isn’t you must delete it.
Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name “tutorial.spr”.
Figure 0:15 The Spreader program contains errors
When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must
not edit this file.
83(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 84(86)
Step 5: Load view
Downloading spreader programs

1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
In the picture below COM1 is selected.
Figure 0:16 Select Connection
2. Press the Download button.

3. Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr).
4. Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the
master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected
node) and than distributed to the master node.
Uploading spreader programs
2. Press the Upload button.

The two following dialogues will appear in sequence.
Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.
Figure 0:18 Save current spreader program
Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to
manually open the uploaded spreader program.)
Figure 0:19 Open spreader program in ABE
3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node.

When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.
84(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 85(86)
Step 6: Online monitoring
Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
1. Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).
3. Make sure Auto is not checked.
Figure 0:21 Deselect Auto option
If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval.
4. Start online monitoring
Figure 0:22 Start online monitoring
The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of
your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the
monitoring again.
5. Update online values by pressing the Update button.
Figure 0:23 Updated online values
85(86) © 2000
ABE_UserManual_1_03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:51 1 86(86)
6. Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.
Figure 0:24 Stop online monitoring
86(86) © 2000
User Manual
BMS - Light
Version 1.03
Revision Issued by Date Measures

PA1 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2000-08-22 First draft.
PA2 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2000-10-13 Added modem functions.
PA3 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2000-10-23 Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed
on cells in string grids.
PA4 Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB 2001-01-10 Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus
functions added.
PA5 Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB 2001-10-29 New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader.
A Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB 2002-06-12 Minor changes after release of System 1.04.
B Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB 2003-06-11 Minor changes after release of System 1.05.
Printed: 03-10-16 10.56

BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 2(22)
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
2 INSTALLING BMS – LIGHT ................................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 HW REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 DISCLAIMER .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
3 USER INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 MENU (TOP TOOLBAR) OPTIONS: ......................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 STATUS BARS IN MAIN WINDOW............................................................................................................................ 5
4 DOWNLOAD VIEW................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 GET LOG VIEW......................................................................................................................................................... 7

5.1 FILTERING CONSTRAINTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8
6 I/O STATUS VIEW..................................................................................................................................................... 9
7 MISC. VIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
ANYBUS VIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 11
8 SPREADER INFO VIEW......................................................................................................................................... 14
9 UPLOAD VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ 17
10 ADVANCED .......................................................................................................................................................... 18
10.1 CAN TESTER ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
10.2 BOOT LOADER .................................................................................................................................................... 20
10.3 ASSERTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 21
10.4 POM LOADER..................................................................................................................................................... 22
2(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 3(22)
1 Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user
has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.
2 Installing BMS – Light
2.1 HW requirements
• An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
• At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
• At least 1Mb of free disk space.
2.2 Installation
• Close any other applications running under Windows.
• Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc)
• Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk.
• Follow the instructions on the screen.
2.3 Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
3(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 4(22)
3 User interface
3.1 Menu (top toolbar) options:
File:
Exit --- Terminates the application.
View:
Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload]
Tools:
Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears.
The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.
Modem connection
Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232
link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node.
Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel.
Help:
About: shows the version of the BMS.
4(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 5(22)
3.2 Status bars in main window
1. Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel.

2. Status of current operation.
3. Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2).
4. Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations.
5. Status of serial cable connection.
2
3
1 4 5
Main window
5(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 6(22)
4 Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to
update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time.
1. Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node.
2. Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes
on the bus.
3. Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded.
4. Connected node (to PC).
5. Receiving node when distributing between nodes.
6. Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts.
7. Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution
between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).
7 5
Download view
6(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 7(22)
5 Get log view

This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log.
1. Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its’ pressed)
2. Get all messages in log.
3. If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4].
4. Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds.
5. Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log.
6. Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here.
7. Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected.
8. Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc.
9. Cancels current operation.
10. Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.
6
4 1 2 5
9
8
7 10
Get log view
7(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 8(22)
5.1 Filtering constraints

Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view.
Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table.
Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not
appear in the filtered table.
1. Message categories
2. Nodes that have reported messages.
3. Message codes for entire table
Filtering constraints
8(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 9(22)
6 I/O status view

This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2.
1. Select node to view.

2. Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press
Write [4]
3. Current value/current overridden value of I/O.
4. Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if
values are to be forced on more than one node.
5. Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown).
6. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6].
7. Update interval for Auto read [6].
Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:

Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be
checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.
1 3
4
5
6 7
8
I/O status view
9(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 10(22)
7 Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2.
1. Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed.
2. Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields.
3. Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields.
4. Get address key information from the node [5].
5. Destination of question.
6. Serial cable connection.
8. Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program
version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Don’t care about the COM
versions.
9. Reboots the system.
Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the
same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer:
Key: 5
E-Stop: YES
Redundancy: YES
Module name: B1
8
2
7
6 5
10(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 11(22)
Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card.
1. Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the
value of that byte in binary format.
2. Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field
the value of that byte in binary format.
3. Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface.
5. Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
6. Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
7. Select node where to Read [3] data from.
11(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 12(22)
3
4
12(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 13(22)
Anybus view
13(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 14(22)
8 Spreader info view

This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders.
Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM.
1. Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited.
2. Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1].
3. Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1].
4. Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value.
5. Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC.
6. Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM.
14(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 15(22)
1
2
5
7
4
3
15(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 16(22)
Spreader info view
16(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 17(22)
9 Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.
Upload view
17(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 18(22)
10 Advanced
These three sub views are mainly intended for Bromma’s R&D personnel only.
10.1 CAN Tester

This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as
Test. See the SCS2 manual for information.
The main functionality is as follows:

• Every node connected to the CAN network is tested.
• Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate.
• When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time.
• The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list.
1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested.

2. Sets the duration time of each test.
3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results.
4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file.
5. Starts the test.
6. Sows status of the CAN test.
7. Closes dialog.
8. Result field showing which node that is tested.
9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used.
10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test.
11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test.
12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test.
13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test.
14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test.
15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test.
16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.
18(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 19(22)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
7
5
CAN Tester view
19(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 20(22)
10.2 Boot Loader

The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node.
1. Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19).

2. Downloads the selected file.
3. Progress bar showing percentage completed.
4. Cancels the download.
5. Closes dialog.
3
1 2 4 5
Boot Loader view
20(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 21(22)
10.3 Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system
events.
Asserts view
21(22) © 2000

Gunnar Ohlsson 2003-10-16 10:56 B 22(22)
10.4 POM Loader

The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .
POM Loader view
22(22) © 2000
Rev 1.01 15/08/03
Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 2(49)
1 General.......................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 References..................................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations .....................................................................................................................................3
1.4 Document layout........................................................................................................................................................3
2 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................4
2.1 General.......................................................................................................................................................................4
2.2 The Nodes ..................................................................................................................................................................5
3 Software .....................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1 Boot Program .............................................................................................................................................................6
3.2 System program .........................................................................................................................................................6
3.3 Spreader Program.......................................................................................................................................................6
4 Hardware Overview ...................................................................................................................................................7
4.1 I/O LED’s ..................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2 Display .......................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2.1 Event categories .................................................................................................................................................8
4.2.2 Message format ..................................................................................................................................................8
4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages...........................................................................................................................9
4.3 Ground connection.....................................................................................................................................................9
4.4 The X1 and X3 connectors.........................................................................................................................................9
4.4.1 X1 I/O connector..............................................................................................................................................10
4.4.2 X3 I/O connector..............................................................................................................................................11
4.5 The X2 connector.....................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.1 Main Supply.....................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.2 CAN .................................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.3 Address Key.....................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.4 Analogue Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................15
4.5.5 PWM Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................15
4.5.6 External Spreader Memory ..............................................................................................................................15
4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI ................................................................................................................................................16
4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group.................................................................................................................................16
4.6 The X4 Connector....................................................................................................................................................17
4.6.1 AnyBus ............................................................................................................................................................18
4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs........................................................................................................................18
4.7 The X5 Connector....................................................................................................................................................19
4.7.1 RS-232 .............................................................................................................................................................19
4.8 The Redundancy Function .......................................................................................................................................19
4.9 Field bus Connections..............................................................................................................................................20
4.9.1 Mapping of I/O ................................................................................................................................................20
4.10 Spreader Stop ...........................................................................................................................................................21
4.11 Fault Finding table ...................................................................................................................................................22
5 Software tools ..........................................................................................................................................................23
5.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................23
5.2 ABE .........................................................................................................................................................................23
5.3 BMS .........................................................................................................................................................................23
6 Miscellaneous ..........................................................................................................................................................24
6.1 Data sheet.................................................................................................................................................................24
6.2 Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................................25
7 Appendix A (Error messages)..................................................................................................................................26
2  2003 Bromma Conquip AB

File: SCS_2_manual_HW.doc Printed:2003-08-15
Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 3(49)
1 General
1.1 Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.
1.2 References
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/
1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations

ABE Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for
details.
BMS Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details.
Boot program The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
CAN Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability
communication.
PWM Pulse Width Modulator.
Spreader Program The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
SCS2 Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The
system will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
System Program The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
SSI Synchronous Serial Interface – sensor interface
1.4 Document layout

Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.
Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 4(49)
2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.
SCS2 includes the following features:
A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel.
Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable — no screening, no twisted pair.
A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net….)
Optional duty cycle input
2.1 General
As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node1 A device directly interfacing with the crane’s control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.
Crane-Spreader Communications Link A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane
control system and the spreader.
Spreader Node A device that interfaces directly with the spreader’s sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.
Sensors and Switches Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
1
For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 5(49)
The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.
Crane
I/O
Slave A1 Slave A4
2
CAN network (BCAN) SCS
B1 Master B2 Slave B8 Slave

I/O
Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.
2.2 The Nodes
The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also
have distributed functions such as regulators.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 6(49)
3 Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.
3.1 Boot Program

When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for

Initialising hardware
Checking that all the system Programs match.
Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
Performing a program downloads.
3.2 System program

After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC via the com-port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Handling in the event log
Reading and writing I/O
3.3 Spreader Program

The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 7(49)
4 Hardware Overview
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.
Bus/AI RS232 Display &

I/O LED (X4) (X5) Power
X1- I/O X2- I/O, bus X3- I/O 1-48 LEDS
Connector & supply Connector
Connector
4.1 I/O LED’s

The I/O LED’s indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V)
of the module.
4.2 Display
The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1
second. The pages show the following:
Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>.
Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours
and MM the number of minutes.
Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain
text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section.
There are also four red LED’s in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different
levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LED’s are lit.
LED1 – 11V, FAIL

LED2 – 14V, WARNING 2
LED3 – 17V, WARNING
LED4 – 21V, OK

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 8(49)
It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may
malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the “power on” indicator.
4.2.1 Event categories

There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error.
Type Prefix Example Note

ERROR E E102 Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are
turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with
an E.
WARNING W W60 Warning shows information about the system status that is of high
importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will
begin with a W.
INFORMATION I I59 Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information

that could qualify to be displayed as information:
Program load status (how many percent are completed), version
verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will
begin with an I.
Information
4.2.2 Message format

The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format:
LTTTSSSS
L = Level type
TTT = Message type
SSSS = Sub type
Example:
E102 => Error in initialising the hardware
W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner
1.
I59 => Information that the system has started.
Level type
The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error
Message type
The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system
version and I/O error.
All these types are described in appendix A.
Sub type

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 9(49)
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings
for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14
instead of just I/O error.
These sub types are described in appendix A.
4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages

Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show
information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for error-
information and error-warning.
Priority in descending order:
Error
Warning
Information
Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the
warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.
4.3 Ground connection

The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the
node for this purpose.
4.4 The X1 and X3 connectors

There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44
are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a “Common” junction. See the connector part for more
detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 10(49)
4.4.1 X1 I/O connector

NAME Description X1 PIN NUMBER
I/O-1 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0 31
I/O-5 General purpose input or output / Locked_0 3



I/O-17 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0 10

I/O-18 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1 20
I/O-19 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0 30
I/O-20 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1 40
I/O-212 General purpose input or output / Lock_left 46

I/O-22 General purpose input or output / Lock_right 47
I/O-23 General purpose input or output / Unlock_left 49
I/O-24 General purpose input or output / Unlock_right 48
2
Redundancy remark.
I/O signals 21 – 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 11(49)
NAME Description X1 PIN NUMBER

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.
X1 - Pin number Link configuration X1 - Pin number Link configuration

12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
24 29
32 37
33 39
34 38
45 36
4.4.2 X3 I/O connector
Name Description X3 pin number




Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 12(49)
Name Description X3 pin number






X3 - Pin number Link configuration X3 - Pin number Link configuration

12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
32 29
33 37
34 38
39

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 13(49)
4.5 The X2 connector

The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.
4.5.1 Main Supply

24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single
pins. DC voltage can be applied either way.
Name Pin number in connector

24INA X2/42
24INA X2/43
24INB X2/45
24INB X2/44
4.5.2 CAN
The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second
net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors.

CAN High 1 X2/30
CAN Low 1 X2/40
CAN High 2 / Reserved3 X2/50
CAN Low 2 / Reserved3 X2/20
CAN GND 2/ Reserved3 X2/2
3
CAN channel is std CAN for future CAN-Open installations

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 14(49)
4.5.3 Address Key

All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 – ID4 where pins being connected to the ground
pin corresponds to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are considered ”ones”.

ID4 X2/49
ID3 X2/39
ID2 X2/29
ID1 X2/19
ID0 X2/9
Ground X2/10
Configuration
Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different
roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling
Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8.
The address key setting is described in the following table:
Key input Node Spreader Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in Node number identifier
name stop override of landing X2 connector when viewing Display and
pins Log
00000 Test 10,9,19,29,39,49
00001 A1 No No 10,19,29,39,49 8
00010 A2 No No 10,9,29,39,49 9
00011 A3 No No 10,29,39,49 10
00100 A4 No No 10,9,19,39,49 11
00101 B1 Yes Yes 10,19,39,49 0
00110 B1 Yes No 10,9,39,49 0
00111 B1 No Yes 10,39,49 0
01000 B1 No No 10,9,19,29,49 0
01001 B2 Yes Yes 10,19,29,49 1
01010 B2 Yes No 10,9,29,49 1
01011 B2 No Yes 10,29,49 1
01100 B2 No No 10,9,19,49 1
01101 B3 No No 10,19,49 2
01110 B4 No No 10,9,49 3
01111 B5 No No 10,49 4
10000 B6 No No 10,9,19,29,39 5
10001 B7 No No 10,19,29,39 6
10010 B8 No No 10,9,29,39 7
10011- Not
11110 Used
11111 Test None
Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key:
A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000.
A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 15(49)
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.
4.5.4 Analogue Inputs

There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal
has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor
device.

Analogue in 1 X2/18
10Vref 1 X2/28
Signal ground 1 X2/8
Analogue in 2 X2/17
10Vref 2 X2/27
Signal ground 2 X2/7
4.5.5 PWM Outputs

There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two
connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop.

PWM out 1 X2/3
PWM in 1 X2/4
PWM out 2 X2/2

PWM in 2 X2/1
PWM out 3 X2/21

PWM in 3 X2/11
PWM out 4 X2/31

PWM in 4 X2/41
4.5.6 External Spreader Memory

An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory
is connected as below.
Name Pin number in connector Cable

10V supply X2/36 Red
Serial data X2/16 Blue
Serial clock X2/26 Green
Signal ground X2/6 Black

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 16(49)
4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI

The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with
external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485
and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time.
When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used:

Channel A X2/38
Channel B X2/37
When used as SSI the following pins are used:

Clock+ X2/38
Clock- X2/37
Data+ X2/15
Data- X2/25
4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group

X2 - Pin number Link configuration

22
23
32
33
34

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 17(49)
4.6 The X4 Connector

The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS
232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin
headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the
relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a
circle to the left is number one in that header.
Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS
232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by
connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.
Front view of connectors inside node.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 18(49)
4.6.1 AnyBus
The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN.

A-Line X4/2
B-Line X4/1
GND-BUS X4/3
4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs

These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2.
The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin
number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on
CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used
internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20
mA range.

GND X5/1
GND X5/2
Analogue Input 1 X5/5
Analogue Reference 10 V X5/3
Analogue Input 2 X5/4

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 19(49)
4.7 The X5 Connector
4.7.1 RS-232
The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose.

TxD X5/1
RxD X5/2
RTS X5/5
CTS X5/3
GND X5/4
4.8 The Redundancy Function

For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the
operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.
C D
B
A E
The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself.
The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program).
The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised
correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation.
At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in
what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only
preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the
redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock
outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on
that particular node.
The outputs to the lock/unlock valves
The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked.
To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as
Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode
and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 20(49)
4.9 Field bus Connections.

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
4.9.1 Mapping of I/O
OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.
Spreader diagnostic area.

Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 21(49)
System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8 => Node ID
Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18 => sequential counter
The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
4.10 Spreader Stop

A Spreader stop function can be used in the system.
This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the
spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2).
The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if
and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in
the spreader program.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 22(49)
4.11 Fault Finding table

Symptom What to do Comment
Power Supply
Node won’t start. No text appears in Measure the main supply. The voltage The green and all red LED’s in the
the display after power-on. should exceed 17V AC or DC. display should be lit.
RS-232
BMS system can not communicate Probe TxD and RxD lines with Data lines should show square waves
with the node. oscilloscope while trying to between –10V to +10V relative to
communicate. GND pin.
CAN
The node can not communicate with Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.
the other nodes. CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.
Digital Ports
Input signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module The LED should be lit when current
responds to sensor signal. flows through the module.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
Output signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module The LED should be lit when the circuit
responds to command. is closed.
Check the load for proper connection The load should be connected between
and grounding. the modules out pin and ground.
Check for broken fuse on the I/O
module.
Check the Common connection for The supply voltage depends on the
correct supply. type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.
Node ID
The node stops at start-up with Node Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V This can indicate that the node has
Id displayed. represent ones and 0V represents wrong id strapped telling the node to
zeroes. The measures should indicate participate in the system with wrong
the expected id. role.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 23(49)
Analogue Inports
Analogue input signal appears to be Check the reference voltage relative to There should be exactly 10V
faulty. the GND. difference between them.
Check if the node chassis is properly This is very important in an AC driven
grounded to the spreader. system.
PWM Outports
PWM output appears to be faulty. Check the load for errors.
Try another load.
5 Software tools
5.1 Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.
5.2 ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.
5.3 BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 24(49)
6 Miscellaneous
6.1 Data sheet
Parameter Note Min Max Unit
Operating voltage Pin X2 42-44 17 40 V AC/DC

Current consumption Depending on number and type of I/O modules 300 800 mA
Power monitoring Level and quality measurement of voltage.
Indicated via LED’s. (faults stored in log)
0
Temperature Operating temperature -40 +85 C
Internal temperature monitoring
IP67
EMC conformity In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
EN 50081-2: 1993
EN 50082-2: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996
EN 61000-4-8:1993
ENV 50204: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995
Controller 32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz
Memory Program 1.4Mb
Log/NVRAM 128kb
External EEPROM 256byte
Time 1*realtime clock
PWM current output 4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected. 0 2,5 A
Analogue inputs 12 bit resolution voltage/current 0 10 V
10V reference voltage output
SSI serial 300 kHz
I/O 48 programmable Voltage depending on type of module used. 12 230 V AC/DC
Galvanic isolation. LED indication.
SC/OL protected 3A.
Scan time System scan time 50 ms
Node scan time 5 ms
Serial interfaces BCAN – Bromma CAN based bus
RS485 – Asynchronous for sensors etc.
RS232 – For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
8 character display for messages & information
Power level via LED’s
Event and error log
FB programming Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 25(49)
6.2 Dimensions
Figure 1 All dimensions in mm

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 26(49)
7 Appendix A (Error messages)

The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.
Nu level Description of code Description of sub code Consequence Hints

m.l
cod
e
0
1 WARNING Failed reading temperature .
2 spare 0 .
3 spare 1 .
4 spare 2 .
5 spare 3 .
6 ERROR Two different PCs' trying to Id of one of the node System is brought into Ensure that only
download to the system connected to the PC failsafe mode. one PC is
downloading
7 spare 4 .
8 spare 5 .
9 spare 6 .
10 spare 7 .
11 spare 8 .
12 ERROR Program memory failure, HW . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fault
13 ERROR No response from slave when . System is brought into Ensure that all
initialising system failsafe mode. slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
14 ERROR Boot sequence failed . System is brought into Restart system
failsafe mode.
15 spare 9 .
16 spare 10 .
17 spare 11 .
18 spare 12 .
19 spare 13 .
20 ERROR Downloading error, connection . System is brought into reload program
broken failsafe mode.
21 spare 14 .
22 ERROR Memory collides when . System is brought into recompile and
downloading program failsafe mode. download
program again

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 27(49)
23 spare 15 .
24 spare 16 .
25 spare 17 .
26 spare 18 .
27 spare 19 .
28 WARNING No data in program/system . System cannot start Contact Bromma
memory
29 spare 20 .
30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt .
31 ERROR HW fault on memory . System is brought into Contact Bromma
failsafe mode. if problem
persists
32 spare 21 .
33 spare 22 .
34 ERROR System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.
35 ERROR System failed in reading . System is brought into reload and
spreader program from memory failsafe mode. restart
36 ERROR No spreader program residing in . System is brought into download
memory failsafe mode. program
37 ERROR System failed to run spreader . System is brought into reload proram
program failsafe mode.
38 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
problems persist
contact Bromma
problems persist
contact Bromma
41 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader.
instances failed failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
problems persist
contact Bromma

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 28(49)

problems persist
contact Bromma
44 WARNING I/O message lost .
45 ERROR Memory failure . System is brought into Restart system.
failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
46 spare 23 .
47 spare 24 .
48 spare 25 .
49 spare 26 .
50 ERROR Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has System is brought into restart
generated the error failsafe mode.
51 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system
52 ERROR System initialising error when The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuring nodes I/O generated the error failsafe mode.
54 spare 27
56 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check

requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
Restart
Restart
59 INFO System started .
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor . Message stored in log and check wiring,
inputs active during system start displayed on Spreader sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 29(49)
61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all locked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking. ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
Unlocked signal has not been which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
received after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
received after first landed and which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
timeout. warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
released when the other sensors which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning and sensor
out adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No . Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within displays/stores message damaged sensors
timeout limit after output has and sensor
been activated adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. ID no. of the sensor Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping missing which displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached generated the warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 30(49)
reasons
70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost Message stored in log and displayed on
position sensor is lost without an sensor Spreader
output.
71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR Duplicate answers from one The node ID which has System is brought into restart (check
node during boot verification generated the error failsafe mode. address keying)
73 ERROR Wrong boot version in a node The node ID which has System is brought into contact Bromma
generated the error failsafe mode.
74 ERROR No answer when master The node ID which has System is brought into restart
requesting boot version. generated the error failsafe mode.
75 spare 28
76 spare 29
77 spare 30
78 spare 31 .
79 spare 32 .
80 ERROR Wrong node answered request The node ID which has System is brought into restart
from master to check if pc was generated the error failsafe mode.
connected
81 ERROR No answer after master request The node ID which has System is brought into restart, check
to check PC port (RS232) generated the error failsafe mode. connections
82 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into retry
failsafe mode.
83 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into Check spreader
(checksum failure) failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be read
85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be set
86 INFO minimum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 31(49)
87 INFO maximum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
88 INFO average system CPU cycle time. time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
Periodically reported every half Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting.
89 spare 33 .
90 INFO The number of control loops The number of the Message stored in log and displayed on
exceeding 100ms for th last half counter Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
91 spare 34 .
92 spare 35 .
93 spare 36 .
94 ERROR No operative system in Node . Systems fails to start contact Bromma
95 ERROR Duplicate answer on The node ID which has System is brought into check adress key
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error failsafe mode.
96 ERROR No answer on Master request for . System is brought into check adress key
"Spreader stop" configuration failsafe mode.
97 INFO Spreader stop has been 0= activated Message stored in log and displayed on
activated/deactivated 1=deactivated Spreader
98 spare 37 .
99 spare 38 .
100 ERROR Spreader program fault . System is brought into recompile and
failsafe mode. reload spreader
program
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer Spreader
102 ERROR System failed to initialise HW . System shutdown contact Bromma

103 spare 39 .
104 spare 40 .
105 ERROR Onboard NV RAM failed . System is brought into check
memory test failsafe mode. battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma
106 spare 41 .
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 32(49)
108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
109 ERROR Battery voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check battery
110 ERROR The System failed to lock th I/O . System is brought into restart
on a node during system init. failsafe mode.
111 spare 42
112 spare 43 .
113 spare 44 .
114 INFO System is shutting down .
115 INFO System shutdown has been .
completed
116 spare 45 .
117 spare 46 .
118 INFO Landed override has been .
activated
119 INFO Landed override has been .
deactivated
120 spare 47 .
121 spare 48 .
122 spare 49 .
123 spare 50 .
124 spare 51 .
125 spare 52 .
126 spare 53 .
127 spare 54 .
128 spare 55 .
129 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 33(49)
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
132 spare 56 .
133 spare 57 .
134 spare 58 .
135 spare 59 .
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
137 spare 60 .
138 spare 61 .
139 spare 62 .
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message The ID type of the Message stored in log and displayed on
received message Spreader
141 INFO CAN messages missed. The count of the Message stored in log and displayed on
Cyclically reported. missed messages Spreader
142 ERROR Two nodes within the system The ID which is System is brought into check and
have the same ID/adress duplicate failsafe mode. correct the
adress key
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
high displayed on Spreader
144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
146 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 34(49)
156 spare 63 .
157 spare 64 .
158 spare 65 .
159 spare 66 .

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 35(49)
160 spare 67 .
161 WARNING CAN error . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
162 WARNING RS232 error . Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader
163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V
164 ERROR Power monitor P1 = sensor . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down
165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and check supplies
Voltage < 21V
166 ERROR Power monitor P2 = internal . System is taken down check supplies
logic supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and check supplies
Voltage < 21V
168 ERROR Power monitor P3 = PWM . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port: Message stored in log and check supplies
I/O port Digital=0+port_no, displayed on Spreader
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.
170 spare 68 .

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 36(49)
171 spare 69 .
172 spare 70 .
173 spare 71 .
174 ERROR No answer when on general . Message stored in log and displayed on
information request between Spreader
nodes.
175 INFO TWL - twistlock lock command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader
176 INFO TWL - twistlock unlock . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader
177 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
locked Spreader
178 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
unlocked Spreader
179 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Expand command received Spreader
180 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader
181 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a speceific requested Spreader
position has been received
182 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
desired position has been requested Spreader
reached
183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position The telescopic motion is check sensor,
The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time stopped until a new pressure,mechan
position within time limit limit. command is given. ics. If necessary
1 = telescope has not Message stored in log and calibrate system.
moved more than 1 cm displayed on Spreader
during 3 seconds.
184 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
expand command received Spreader

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 37(49)
Retract command received Spreader
186 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a specific requested Spreader
position received
187 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
The desired position reached requested Spreader
188 INFO The year has been set current value (year) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
189 INFO The month has been set current value (month) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
190 INFO The day/date has been set current value (date) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
191 INFO The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour) Message stored in log and displayed on
set Spreader
192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for The ID of the node Message stored in log and check
10s which doesn't have displayed on Spreader connections
contact
193 ERROR Message reported during boot. . restart (check

Unknown role address keying)
194 INFO Information request (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader
195 INFO Download request active . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader
196 INFO Information request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
197 INFO set time request received . Message stored in log and displayed on

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 38(49)
198 INFO Boot version request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
199 spare 72 .
200 INFO Download flag request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
201 spare 73 .
202 spare 74 .
203 spare 75 .
204 spare 76 .
205 INFO Check flash memory request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received. (system boot Spreader
functionality)
206 INFO Restart node request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
207 INFO System start init. (system boot . Message stored in log and displayed on
functionality) Spreader
208 INFO System look for downloadflag. . Message stored in log and displayed on
209 INFO Send datablock request. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
210 INFO Received datablock. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
211 INFO Download in progress percentage of progress shown on Spreader display

downloaded data
212 INFO copy serial information to flash . Message stored in log and displayed on
memory Spreader
213 spare 77 .
214 spare 78 .
215 ERROR No answer when waiting for . System is brought into failsafe mode.
present nodes response

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 39(49)
216 INFO Inforamtion on present nodes . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader
217 ERROR Download timeout . System is brought into reload

failsafe mode.
218 spare 79 .
219 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
220 ERROR The size of received data is to . System is brought into failsafe mode.
large. Boot message
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
227 spare 80 .
during boot
229 INFO Spreader error and event log has . Message stored in log and displayed on
been cleared Spreader
230 ERROR Failed to set up spreader destination of error System is brought into Check spreader
program correctly failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
231 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 40(49)
232 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
233 INFO Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader
234 INFO Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and displayed on
235 INFO Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and displayed on
236 INFO Reboot (restart) request sent . Message stored in log and displayed on
from master to slaves. Happens Spreader
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
237 INFO System has been taken down to . Message stored in log and displayed on
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake Spreader
up.
238 Spare 81 .
239 INFO System failed to cancel . Message stored in log and displayed on
shutdown process Spreader
240 INFO No answer when attempting to . Message stored in log and displayed on
cancel shutdown process Spreader
241 INFO System received timeout when . Message stored in log and displayed on
attempting to cancel shutdown Spreader
process
242 INFO System shutdown aborted . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
243 spare 82 .
244 INFO TWL - The spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
landed Spreader
245 INFO TWL - The Spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
totally lifted (not landed) Spreader

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 41(49)
246 INFO FLIPPER - flipper up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader
247 INFO FLIPPER - flipper down . Message stored in log and displayed on
248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V
249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
Voltage <17V
250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
Voltage < 17V
251 ERROR System failed to initialise fielbus . System is brought into failsafe mode.
interface
252 ERROR Duplicate answers when setting . System is brought into failsafe mode.
up fieldbus interface
253 ERROR No answer when configuring . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fieldbus interface
254 WARNING System failed in locking .
fieldbus interface
255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their upper failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors
256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors
257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 42(49)
258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader
259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader
260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors
261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors
262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their lower failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors
263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
unexpectedly. (not due to failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
output) nics/sensors
264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
received when twinboxes are failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
down nics/sensors
265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 43(49)
269 ERROR System failed to init. RS485 Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
failsafe mode. Bromma
270 ERROR Duplicate answers in system Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
when setting up RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
271 ERROR System timed out when trying to . System is brought into restart / contact
configure RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
Teach in command received Spreader
273 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - expand . Message stored in log and displayed on

274 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - retract . Message stored in log and displayed on

275 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - left . Message stored in log and displayed on

console reached zero gap Spreader
position
276 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - right . Message stored in log and displayed on

console reached zero gap Spreader
position
277 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on

expand in motion Spreader
278 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on

retract in motion Spreader
279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't . motion is stopped. check

reached an endstop when in Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
motion within time limit displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves
280 spare 83 .
281 INFO TWINMPS - teaching a pre- The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
defined position teached Spreader
282 INFO TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
a pre-defined position has been requested Spreader
received

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 44(49)
283 INFO TWINMPS - A command to . Message stored in log and displayed on

store a new value for a log Spreader
position has been received
284 INFO TWINMPS - A command to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
return to a log position has been requested Spreader
received
285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs . Motion is stopped. check

haven't reached their requested Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
position within time limit. displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves
286 INFO TWIN195 - twin up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader
287 INFO TWIN195 - twin down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command has been received Spreader
288 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their upper position Spreader
289 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their lower position Spreader
290 INFO TTDS - override request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader
291 INFO TTDS - override request ended . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial . Message stored in log and displayed on
port info over CAN bus Spreader
293 WARNING No answer when transferring . Message stored in log and displayed on
serial port info over Can bus Spreader
294 ERROR Failed to communicate with . System is brought

RS485 into failsafe mode.
295 spare 84 .
296 spare 85 .

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 45(49)
297 spare 86 .
298 ERROR Failed reading spreader System is brought into Check spreader
program. failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
299 spare 87
300 spare 88
301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader
302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader
303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup Node ID

304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock
AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup
306 INFO Spreader properties Number of containers Message stored in log and
loaded/unloaded displayed on Spreader
307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure Message stored in log and
308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok Message stored in log and
309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok Message stored in log and
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup
311 ERROR Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM
312 WARNING Spreader properties

318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM
set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 46(49)
323 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node
324 INFO RS485 status ok

325 INFO Gravity point to centre
command
326 INFO Gravity point to left side
command
327 INFO Gravity point to right side
command
328 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
centre position
left end stop
right endstop
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap .
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.
332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has .

wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO Added value to NVRAM .
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding digital I/O
regarding analogue I/O
regarding encoder data
regarding AnyBus message
regarding RS485 data
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code
341 ERROR Error when trying to dowload .
program
342 ERROR Node is missing on the bus node that is missing
during system start.

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 47(49)
343 ERROR Inclination sensor initialisation node that failed to initialise the sensor
error
344 ERROR Timeout when trying to node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor
regarding inclination sensor
346 INFO Node bus communication ok. .
BCAN ok
347 INFO BCAN bus status warning. .
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .
349 ERROR AnyBus Spreader/systems node from which an answer is expected
diagnostic area failed to set up.
350 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
351 ERROR AnyBus Assert diagnostic area node from which an answer is expected
failed to set up
352 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.
353 INFO Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value
354 INFO AnyBus slave card plugged in

node ID holding the
card
355 INFO AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing node ID of the node missing the card
357 INFO AnyBus Input data area size size of data area (bytes)
358 INFO AnyBus output data area size size of data area (bytes)
359 ERROR Hardware initialisation failed psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
(system prog.)
360 ERROR NVRAM full. No space left for .

Storage
361 ERROR NVRAM checksum Error .
362 ERROR OS code. Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
363 ERROR OS subcode.Operating system code from OS call Bromma
fatal error
364 ERROR OS extra.Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
365 ERROR Local regulator (PID) failed. node ID that failed to restart
initialise the regulator

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 48(49)
366 ERROR Local regulator (PID) timeout . retstart

367 ERROR Error in interpreting the spreader . Check versions
program. Parameter mismatch of system and
between system and ABE file. ABE.
368 ERROR Error in recognising a . Check versions

component downloaded with the of system and
spreader program ABE.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached .
the requested position within
time limit.
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR Error in locking regulator setup .
372 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.
373 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing
to with the actual value
set in the Spreader info.
374 INFO The time of day (minute) has Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on
been set Spreader
375 INFO Received a change bitrate Requested bitrate

request. Boot message.
376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on

values from left hook Spreader
377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on

values from right hook Spreader
378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(start sequence) handle start sequence. Spreader
(download sequence) download. Spreader

Manual SCS2
Andy Lewis 2003-08-15 11 49(49)
(finish sequence) handle finish sequence. Spreader
381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader
382 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader
383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader
384 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader
385 INFO AutoTuner stored in NVRAM Regulator index. Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
BROMMA CONQUIP
KROSSGATAN 31-33
S-162 50 VÄLLINGBY
E-mail : SALES@BROMMA.COM
Tel : +46 (0)8 620 09 00
B B
Customer : Gottwald GOTTWALD

Plant designation : A1
C
Drawing Number : 1002493 C
Revision : a
Manufacturer (Company) : BROMMA CONQUIP
Project name : EH170U_SCS² CANopen

D D
Serial Number : -
Types : EH170
Responsible for project :
Sub. drawings : BROMMA SPREADER EH170

E E
Created on the :
The latest revition : 2005-02-10 By : LAT Number of pages : 52
Manufacturing site :
1
EH170
SCS² CANopen
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:
This drawing is copyright, and is

- the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
2
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM TOTAL SH.
52
F
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=) PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.
ITEM SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE

consent of the owner. STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-05 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of content
Plant des. Location Page Page description Rev Revision note Date Editor
1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 2005-01-05 bln
2 Table of contents 2005-02-10 LAT
3 Table of contents 2005-01-24 bln
A1 X0 4 Connector designation 2005-01-24 bln
A1 X1 5 Circuit diagram 2005-01-24 bln
A1 X1 7 Circuit diagram 2005-02-09 LAT
2
EH170
SCS² CANopen
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
3
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Table of contents TOTAL SH.
52
DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=) PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
Table of content
Plant des. Location Page Page description Rev Revision note Date Editor
31 PLC diagram 2005-01-24 bln
32 I/O card overview 2005-01-24 bln
A1 X0 33 I/O card overview 2005-01-24 bln
A1 X1 37 Cabinet layout 2005-02-09 LAT
A1 X0 38 Cable/ Sensor Layout 2005-01-04 bln
A1 X1 39 Cabinet layout 2005-01-04 bln
A1 X0 42 Spreader layout 2005-01-24 bln
A1 X0 43 Spreader layout 2005-01-24 bln
44 Parts list: ( - ) 2005-02-10 LAT
45 Parts list: ( - ) 2005-02-10 LAT
46 CABLE LIST 2005-02-10 LAT
3
EH170
SCS² CANopen
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
4
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Table of contents TOTAL SH.
52
DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=) PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A SPREADER CONNECTOR A
XP1 SPREADER MALE CONTACT

1 POWER SUPPLY L1
2 POWER SUPPLY L2
3 TWIN DOWN SIGNAL
4 POWER SUPPLY L3
5 CONTROL VOLTAGE N
B 6 CONTROL VOLTAGE L B
7 CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT
8 TELESCOPE RETRACT COMMAND XP1 PIN DESCRIPTION
9 TELESCOPE EXPAND COMMAND
10 ALL FLIPPERS UP COMMAND
1 2 3 4
11 GREEN FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND
12 YELLOW FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND 5 6 7 8 9
13 BLUE FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND

10 11 12 13 14 15
14 RED FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND
15 TWL LOCK COMMAND 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
C 16 TWL UNLOCK COMMAND C

23 24 25 26 27 28
17 LOCKED SIGNAL
18 UNLOCKED SIGNAL 29 30 31 32 33
19 MOVE G.P. TO BLUE COMMAND

34 35 36 37
20 MOVE G.P. TO YELLOW COMMAND
RED POINT
21 G.P. IN CENTRE SIGNAL
22 LANDED SIGNAL
MALE INSERT
23 TWIN LEGS UP COMMAND
24 TWIN LEGS DOWN COMMAND
25 SPARE PLUG= ODU 309 012 000 554 000 BROMMA Nr.71480
D 26 SPARE INSERT = ODU 309 803 150 037 151 BROMMA Nr.74410 D
27 SPARE
28 SPARE
29 SPARE
30 H.I.S OR TTDC SIGNAL (OPTION)
31 POWER SUPPLY L1
32 POWER SUPPLY L2
33 PROTECTION EARTH PE
34 POWER SUPPLY L3
35 CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT
E 36 SPARE E
37 PROTECTION EARTH PE
4
EH170
SCS² CANopen
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
5
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Connector designation TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
X0 FILENAME: 1002493 a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A1
A +X0 -XP1 1 31 2 32 4 34 33 37 A
-WXP1 1 31 2 32 4 34 33 PE
1 1
-X2 :L1 :L1 :L2 :L2 :L3 :L3 :PE :PE 1 3 5 1 3 5 -F1 -P1 h
2A 2 2
-QM8 I> I> I> -QM1 I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6
B B
1 3 5
-Q1
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-K8 -K9 -K2 -K3
/10.04 2 4 6 /10.05 2 4 6 /10.01 2 4 6 /10.02 2 4 6
1 3 5
-K1
/7.01 2 4 6
C C
/6.01 / -Phase L1
/6.01 / -Phase L2
/6.01 / -Phase L3
-XP23 7 8 9 21 -X2 :1 :2 :3 :PE
A1
+X0
-WXP23 7 8 9 21 -WM1 1 2 3 PE
A1
D +X100 -X2 :7 :8 :9 :PE D
-WM4 1 2 3 PE
U V W
U V W 3
-M4 M
3
-M1 M
5.5KW 3 ~
3.0KW 3 ~ 2
2
E PE
PE -BRAKE1 E
-BRAKE2
-M4 -M1
Telescopic motor Gravity point motor
5
EH170
SCS² CANopen
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
6
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Circuit diagram TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
/5.01 / -Phase L3
/5.01 / -Phase L2
/5.01 / -Phase L1
-X2 :101 :103 :102 :104

1 3 5
B -K6 1 3 5 B
-QM10 I> I> I>
/10.03 2 4 6 14 12 24 22
-KA1 -KA1
2 4 6
/7.07 /7.07
11 21
1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
-QM6 -QM7 -K10
I> I> I> I> I> I>
/10.06 2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6
C C
L
-XP23 1 2 3 22 4 5 6 PE 10 11 12 20 -EH1
N
A1
+X0 -WXP23 1 2 3 22 4 5 6 PE 10 11 12 20
A1
D +X100 D
-X2 :1 :2 :3 :PE :4 :5 :6 :PE :10 :11 :12 :PE
-WM2 1 2 3 PE -WM3 1 2 3 PE -WM5 1 2 3 PE
U V W U V W U V W
-M2 M -M3 M -M5 M

2.2KW 3 ~ 2.2KW 3 ~ -HINK_X0 3.0KW 3 ~
E PE PE PE
E
-M2 -M3 -M5

Hydralic pump Hydralic pump Hydraulic pump Cabinet heater
left right twin
6
EH170
SCS² CANopen
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
7
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A1
+X0 -XP1 6 35 7 5
A
-WXP1 6 35 7 5 NOTE: A
All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected

-X2 :107 :201 :108 :202
13
-Q1
/5.01 14
1 3
B -F2 -X2 :N B
10A 2 4
:N -N.VAC / /14.00
.01
21 :L
-SS1 -L.VAC / /12.00
22
-X2 :L
GND
L N
BN YL/GL BU
C C
90-255VAC -G1 A1
---- -KA1
A2 A2
24VDC
-K1
A1
RD RD BK BK
-24VDC SCS² / /15.00
+ + - -
-24VDC / /14.00
-0VDC / /15.00
11
-SS1
.01 12
D D
NOTE:
-X1 Wire for 24VDC
:2 7 8
.01
shall bee 2,5mm²
:1 with blue colour.
-X1 :3 -K1 :+ :+ :+ :+ :+ :+ :+ :- :- :- :- :- :- :-
/14.00 / -Spreader stop
-XP21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14
11/6.08
1 2/5.01 12
24
3 4/5.01 21/6.09
E 22 E
/8.08 / -XP21:10
/8.08 / -XP21:1
/8.08 / -XP21:2
/8.09 / -XP21:3
/8.09 / -XP21:4
/8.09 / -XP21:5
/8.07 / -XP21:6
/8.07 / -XP21:7
/8.08 / -XP21:8
/8.08 / -XP21:9
5 6/5.01
7 8 .04
Spreader -KA1
. 24VDC . + 24VDC 0 VDC . .
stop Cabinet heater
7
EH170
SCS² CANopen
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
8
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F
E
B
A
D
C
-
-
-
-
ITEM
+X0
+X0
A1
A1
A1
+X100
0
0
-WX2
-X1
red -+VBB X2 / /17.09
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
:1
blue -GND X2 / /17.09
-WXP22
:8
/15.06 / -CAN high X1 White white -Can high X2 / /16.09
:15
/15.06 / -CAN low X1 Brown brown -Can low X2 / /16.09
:22
1
1
-WX3
red -+VBB X3 / /19.09
:2
SIGN.
blue -GND X3 / /19.09
:9
white -Can high X3 / /18.09
DATE
:16
brown -Can low X3 / /18.09
:23
2
2
-WX4
red -+VBB X4 / /23.09
:3
blue -GND X4 / /23.09
:10

:17
consent of the owner.

:24
3
3
-WX5
The design and/or constructions

red -+VBB X5 / /25.09
or reproduced, whitout the written

:4

blue -GND X5 / /25.09

:11

:18

:25
4
4
-WX8
red -+VBB X8 / /21.09

:5
blue -GND X8 / /21.09

:12

:19
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
:26
5
5
-WX10
red -+VBB X10 / /27.09

:6
blue -GND X10 / /27.09

:13
white
SERIAL NO.
DRAWN BY:
-Can high X10 / /26.09
CHECKED BY:
:20
MACHINE TYPE:
DRAWING DATE:
- brown -Can low X10 / /26.09
6
6
:27
bln
EH170
-WX13
red -VBB X13 / /29.09

2005-01-24
:7
blue -GND X13 / /29.09

:14
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
white
:
:
-Can high X13 / /28.09

:21
X1
A1
-WXP21

7
7
:28
/7.06 / -XP21:6
7
PLOTTED:
/7.06 / -XP21:7
FILENAME:
8
/7.06 / -XP21:8
9
/7.06 / -XP21:9
10
2005-02-10
/7.06 / -XP21:10
8
8
/7.04 / -XP21:1
1
10:11
SCS² CANopen
Circuit diagram
/7.04 / -XP21:2
2
/7.05 / -XP21:3
DRAWING NO.
3
/7.05 / -XP21:4
4
-0VDC / +X1/9.00
/7.05 / -XP21:5
5
9
9
1002493
CONT.
SHEET
TOTAL SH.
a
REV.
9
8
52
F
E
B
A
D
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-B1 COMMON GROUP 1 COMMON GROUP 2
PIN NO: 21
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A
O O O O O O O O
PIN NO: 44
I I I I I I I I
+B1-XPX1 :44 :31 :41 :43 :42 :21 :3 :2 :11 :1
B B
.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / .00
-XP23 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A1
+X0
-WXP23 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A1
C +X100 C
+X1/8.08 / -0VDC
-X1 :14
-X2 :13 :14 :15 :16 :17 :18 :19 :16
D D
-WHL 5-8 1 2 3 4 5
-WHL 1-4 1 2 3 4 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-HL1 -HL2 -HL3 -HL4 -HL5 -HL6 -HL7 -HL8
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Green Red White Yellow Green Red White Yellow
E E
-HL1 -HL2 -HL3 -HL4 -HL5 -HL6 -HL7 -HL8

Unlocked left Locked left Landed left Tower in center left Unlocked right Locked right Landed right Tower in centre right
9
EH170
SCS² CANopen
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
10
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PIN NO: 21
A 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A
O O O O O O O O
PIN NO: 44
I I I I I I I I
+B1-XPX1 :8 :26 :16 :6 :7 :35 :4 :5 :25 :15
.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / .00

B B
C C
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-K2 -K3 -K6 -K8 -K9 -K10
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
D D
.09 / -0VDC -0VDC / .00
1 2 /5.07 1 2/5.08 1 2 /6.02 1 2 /5.04 1 2/5.05 1 2 /6.06

E 3 4 /5.07 3 4/5.08 3 4 /6.02 3 4 /5.04 3 4/5.05 3 4 /6.06 E
5 6 /5.07 5 6/5.08 5 6 /6.02 5 6 /5.04 5 6/5.05 5 6 /6.06
K2 K3 K6 K8 K9 K10
Not Not
Gravity point Gravity point Hydralic pump Retract Extend Hydraulic pump
connected connected
to left to right left/right gable telescope telescope twin
EH170
SCS² CANopen 10
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
11
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-04 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A
O O O O O O O O
PIN NO: 50
PIN NO: 9
I I I I I I I I
+B1-XPX1 :9 :10 :20 :30 :40 :50 :46 :47 :49 :48
.09 / -L.VAC -L.VAC / .00
B B
C -X2 :109
C
A1
+X0 -WXP1 3
-XP1 3
D D
E E
EH170
SCS² CANopen 11
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
12
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PIN NO: 43
A 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 A
O O O O O O O O
PIN NO: 11
I I I I I I I I
+B1-XPX3 :11 :21 :31 :41 :42 :43 :24 :35 :44 :45
/7.08 / -L.VAC
B B
C C
-X2 :110 :111 :112 :113 :114 :115 :116 :117
A1
+X0 -WXP1 17 18 22 21 30
-XP1 17 18 22 21 30
D D
E E
Locked Unlocked Spreader landed G.p. in centre G.P. at left G.P. at right H.I.S TTDS ok
signal signal signal signal signal signal signal (option) signal (option)
EH170
SCS² CANopen 12
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
13
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
A1
B B
+X0 -XP1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
-WXP1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
-X2 :118 :119 :120 :121 :122 :123 :124

C C
D D
.08 / -N.VAC -N.VAC / .00
+B1-XPX3 :1 :5 :4 :3 :2 :15 :6 :16 :25 :26
-B1
E I I I I I I I I
E
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
PIN NO: 15
PIN NO: 1
O O O O O O O O
COMMON GROUP 9 COMMON GROUP 10
Telescope Telescope Flippers Flipper Flipper Flipper Flipper

Not
retract expand all up waterside down right down left down landside down
connected
CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD
EH170
SCS² CANopen 13
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
14
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-18 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
A1
+X0 -XP1 15 16 19 20 23 24
-WXP1 15 16 19 20 23 24
B B
-X2 :125 :126 :127 :128 :129 :130
C C
/7.08 / -24VDC
/7.00 / -Spreader stop GRAV.POINT

13
-SB1 AUT. RETURN
OFF ON
14
.09 / -0VDC -0VDC / .00
D D
/7.08 / -N.VAC
+B1-XPX3 :36 :49 :48 :47 :46 :8 :7 :10 :9 :40 :50 :30 :20
-B1
E I I I I I I I I
E
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
PIN NO: 36
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 20
PIN NO: 8
O O O O O O O O
COMMON GROUP 11
Twl Twl G.p. G.p. Twin legs Twin legs

Spreader G.p.
lock unlock move to left move to right up down
stop auto return
CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD CMD
EH170
SCS² CANopen 14
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
15
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-18 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
-CAN high X1 / /8.01
-CAN low X1 / /8.01

-X2 :131 :132
-XP22 2 3
C C
-WXP22 white brown

EEPROM
/7.08 / -0VDC
WH;BN
BN;GN
/7.08 / -24VDC SCS²
D D
RED
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
WH
GN
-KEY1
6 16 26 36
+B1-XPX2 :42 :43 :44 :45 :10 :9 :19 :29 :39 :49 :30 :40 :50 :20 :48 :6 :16 :26 :36
-B1
Can-open H
+24V
+24V
Can-open L
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
ID0
ID1
ID3
ID4
ID5
Can-GND
SD
SC
B-Can H
B-Can L
E E
Main supply Node

. . B-Can Can-open EEPROM .
node B1 Address
EH170
SCS² CANopen 15
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
16
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:11 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-18 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
B + - + - + - + - + - + - B
-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01

-S1 -S5 -S2 -S6 -S9 -S10
-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01

4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS1-S5 4 2 -WS2-S6 4 2 -WS9 4 -WS10 4
C C
D D
1
-R2
2
-X2 +X2-XP1 4 2 +X2-XP3 4 2 +X2-XP5 4 2 +X2-XP7 4 2 +X2-X0 :1 :2

E /17.00 Node ID: 2 E
CAN_high
Left gable end
CAN_low
I In 1 I In 5 I In 2 I In 6 I In 3 I In 7 I In 4 I In 8
O O O O O O O O
-S1 -S5 -S2 -S6 -S9 -S10

Unlocked Locked Unlocked Locked Landed Spare Landed Spare CAN-open
left landside left landside left waterside left waterside left landside left waterside Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 16
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
17
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X2
Out 1 Out 5 Out 2 Out 6 Out 3 Out 7 Out 4 Out 8
O O O O O O O O
/16.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: 2
+VBB
GND
A A
Left gable end
+X2-XP2 4 2 +X2-XP4 4 2 +X2-XP6 4 2 +X2-XP8 4 2 +X2-X0 :3 :5
B B
-WY7-Y8 A B -WY1-Y2 A B -WY3-Y4 A B -WY5-Y6 A B
C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-Y7 -Y8 -Y1 -Y2 -Y3 -Y4 -Y5 -Y6
A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2
+X1/8.01 / -GND X2
+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2
D D
E E
-Y7 -Y8 -Y1 -Y2 -Y3 -Y4 -Y5 -Y6

Twistlock Twistlock Flipper 1 up Flipper 1 down Flipper 2 up Flipper 2 down Flipper 5 up Flipper 5 down CAN-open
unlock left lock left left landside left landside left waterside left waterside left centre left centre Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 17
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
18
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02
-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
-S3 -S7 -S4 -S8 -S11 -S12
4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS3-S7 4 2 -WS4-S8 4 2 -WS11 4 -WS12 4
C C
D D
1
-R3
2

E /19.00 Node ID: 3 E
CAN_high
Right gable end
CAN_low
O O O O O O O O
-S3 -S7 -S4 -S8 -S11 -S12

Unlocked Locked Unlocked Locked Landed Spare Landed Spare CAN-open
right waterside right waterside right landside right landside right waterside right landside Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 18
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
19
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X3
O O O O O O O O
/18.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: 3
+VBB
GND
A A
Right gable end
+X3-XP2 4 2 +X3-XP4 4 2 +X3-XP6 4 2 +X3-XP8 4 2 +X3-X0 :3 :5
B B
-WY15-Y16 A B -WY9-Y10 A B -WY11-Y12 A B -WY13-Y14 A B
C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-Y15 -Y16 -Y9 -Y10 -Y11 -Y12 -Y13 -Y14
A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2
+X1/8.02 / -GND X3
+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3
D D
E E
-Y15 -Y16 -Y9 -Y10 -Y11 -Y12 -Y13 -Y14

Twistlock Twistlock Flipper 3 up Flipper 3 down Flipper 4 up Flipper 4 down Flipper 6 up Flipper 6 down CAN-open
unlock right lock right right waterside right waterside right landside right landside right centre right centre Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 19
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
20
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
B + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - B
-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05

-S54 -S55 -S52 -S53 -S13 -S16 -S14 -S114
-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS54-S55 4 2 -WS52-S53 4 2 -WS13-S16 4 2 -WS14-S114 4 2
C C
D D

E /21.00 Node ID: 8 E
CAN_high
Centre landside
CAN_low
O O O O O O O O
-S54 -S55 -S52 -S53 -S13 -S16 -S14 -S114

G.P tower GP tower G.P tower G.P tower 20' telescope 40' telescope 30' telescope 30' telescope CAN-open
left stop right stop left centre right centre position positon positon positon Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 20
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
21
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X8
O O O O O O O O
/20.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: 8
+VBB
A A
GND
Centre landside
+X8-XP2 4 2 +X8-XP4 4 2 +X8-XP6 4 2 +X8-XP8 4 2 +X8-X0 :3 :5
B B
C C
+X1/8.05 / -GND X8
+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8
D D
E E
Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare CAN-open

Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 21
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
22
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-18 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
-Can high X4 / +X1/8.03

B B
-Can low X4 / +X1/8.03

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S24 -S28 -S32 -S36 -S27 -S31 -S35 -S39
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS24-S28 4 2 -WS32-S36 4 2 -WS27-S31 4 2 -WS35-S39 4 2
C C
D D

E /23.00 Node ID: 4 E
CAN_high
Centre landside
CAN_low
O O O O O O O O
-S24 -S28 -S32 -S36 -S27 -S31 -S35 -S39

Twin 1 unlocked Twin 1 locked Twin 1 landed Twin 1 up Twin 4 unlocked Twin 4 locked Twin 4 landed Twin 4 up CAN-open
left landside left landside left landside left landside right landside right landside right landside right landside Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 22
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
23
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X4
O O O O O O O O
/22.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: 4
+VBB
A A
GND
Centre landside
+X4-XP2 4 2 +X4-XP4 4 2 +X4-XP6 4 2 +X4-XP8 4 2 +X4-X0 :3 :5
B B
C -WY25-Y26 A B -WY27-Y28 A B C
1 1 1 1
-Y25 -Y26 -Y27 -Y28
+X1/8.03 / -GND X4
+X1/8.02 / -+VBB X4
A 2 B 2 A 2 B 2
D D
E E
-Y27 -Y28
-Y25 -Y26
Twin twistlock Twin twistlock Spare Spare Spare Spare CAN-open
Twin legs up Twin legs down
unlock lock Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 23
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
24
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
B B
-Can high X5 / +X1/8.04
-Can low X5 / +X1/8.04

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
- - + - - - - + - -
+ + + + + +
-S25 -S29 -S33 -S37 -S26 -S30 -S34 -S38
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS25-S29 4 2 -WS33-S37 4 2 -WS26-S30 4 2 -WS34-S38 4 2
C C
D D
-X5 +X5-XP1 4 2 +X5-XP3 4 2 +X5-XP5 4 2 +X5-XP7 4 2

+X5-X0
E /25.00 Node ID: 5 :1 :2 E
Centre waterside
CAN_high
CAN_low
O O O O O O O O
-S25 -S29 -S33 -S37 -S26 -S30 -S34 -S38

Twin 2 unlocked Twin 2 locked Twin 2 landed Twin 2 up Twin 3 unlocked Twin 3 locked Twin 3 landed Twin 3 up CAN-open
left waterside left waterside left waterside left waterside right waterside right waterside right waterside right waterside Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 24
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
25
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X5
O O O O O O O O
/24.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: 5
+VBB
A A
GND
Centre waterside
+X5-XP2 4 2 +X5-XP4 4 2 +X5-XP6 4 2 +X5-XP8 4 2 +X5-X0 :3 :5
B B
C C
+X1/8.04 / -GND X5
+X1/8.03 / -+VBB X5
D D
E E

Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 25
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
26
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-18 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
-S40 -S43 -S41 -S42 -S83 -S84
B B
-Can high X10 / +X1/8.06
-Can low X10 / +X1/8.06

4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS40-S43 4 2 -WS41-S42 4 2 -WS83 4 -WS84 4
C C
D D

E /27.00 Node ID: A E
CAN_high
Centre waterside
CAN_low
O O O O O O O O
-S40 -S43 -S41 -S42 -S83 -S84

Twin 1 down Twin 4 down Twin 2 down Twin 3 down High indication Spare High indication Spare CAN-open
left landside right landside left waterside right waterside left (option) right (option) Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 26
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
27
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X10
O O O O O O O O
/26.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: A
+VBB
A A
GND
Centre waterside
+X10-XP2 4 2 +X10-XP4 4 2 +X10-XP6 4 2 +X10-XP8 4 2 +X10-X0 :3 :5
B B
-WHL9 4 -WHL10 4
C C
1 1
-HL9 -HL10
+X1/8.06 / -GND X10
+X1/8.05 / -+VBB X10

2 2
Blue Blue
D D
E E
-HL9 -HL10
Twin legs down Spare Twin legs down Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare CAN-open
landside waterside Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 27
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
28
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X13 Option
A A
B B
-Can high X13 / +X1/8.07
-Can low X13 / +X1/8.07

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + -
-S90 -S91 -S92 -S93 -S94 -S95 -S96
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-WS90-S91 4 2 -WS92-S93 4 2 -WS94 4 -WS95-S96 4 2
C C
D D

E /29.00 Node ID: 13 E
CAN_high
Centre landside
CAN_low
O O O O O O O O
option
-S90 -S91 -S92 -S93 -S94 -S95 -S96
TTDS TTDS TTDS TTDS TTDS Spare TTDS TTDS CAN-open
sensor sensor sensor sensor sensor sensor sensor Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 28
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
29
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-04 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X13
O O O O O O O O
/28.00 I I I I I I I I
Node ID: 13
+VBB
A A
GND
Centre landside
option +X13-XP2 4 2 +X13-XP4 4 2 +X13-XP6 4 2 +X13-XP8 4 2 +X13-X0 :3 :5
B B
C C
+X1/8.07 / -GND X13
+X1/8.06 / -VBB X13

D D
E E

Interface / Supply
EH170
SCS² CANopen 29
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
30
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
MOTOR WITH BRAKE AND CURRENT RELAY
SR
B B
ws rt
ws bl
C BGE C
ws
1
W2 U2 V2 rt
2
BS
3
D
TS
4 D
U1 V1 W1 bl
5
E E
L1 L2 L3
EH170
SCS² CANopen 30
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
31
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-04 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NODE I/O TYPE PIN NR. DESCRIPTION NODE I/O TYPE PIN NR. DESCRIPTION
-B1 1 Digital output -XPX1:31 -HL1 Unlocked left -B1 25 Digital output -XPX3:21 Locked signal
-B1 2 Digital output -XPX1:41 -HL2 Locked left -B1 26 Digital output -XPX3:31 Unlocked signal
-B1 3 Digital output -XPX1:43 -HL3 Landed left -B1 27 Digital output -XPX3:41 Spreader landed signal
-B1 4 Digital output -XPX1:42 -HL4 Tower in center left -B1 28 Digital output -XPX3:42 G.p. in centre signal
-B1 5 Digital output -XPX1 :3 -HL5 Unlocked right -B1 29 Digital output -XPX3:24 G.P. at left signal
-B1 6 Digital output -XPX1 :2 -HL6 Locked right -B1 30 Digital output -XPX3:35 G.P. at right signal
-B1 7 Digital output -XPX1:11 -HL7 Landed right -B1 31 Digital output -XPX3:44 H.I.S signal (option)
-B1 8 Digital output -XPX1 :1 Not connected -B1 32 Digital output -XPX3:45 TTDS ok signal (option)
-B1 9 Digital output -XPX1:26 K2 Gravity point to left -B1 33 Digital input -XPX3 :5 Telescope retract CMD
-B1 10 Digital output -XPX1:16 K3 Gravity point to right -B1 34 Digital input -XPX3 :4 Telescope expand CMD
-B1 11 Digital output -XPX1 :6 K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable -B1 35 Digital input -XPX3 :3 Flippers all up CMD
-B1 12 Digital output -XPX1 :7 K8 Retract telescope -B1 36 Digital input -XPX3 :2 Flipper waterside down CMD
-B1 13 Digital output -XPX1 :4 K9 Extend telescope -B1 37 Digital input -XPX3 :6 Flipper right down CMD
-B1 14 Digital output -XPX1 :5 K10 Hydraulic pump twin -B1 38 Digital input -XPX3:16 Flipper left down CMD
-B1 15 Digital output -XPX1:25 Not connected -B1 39 Digital input -XPX3:25 Flipper landside down CMD
-B1 16 Digital output -XPX1:15 Not connected -B1 40 Digital input -XPX3:26 Not connected
-B1 17 Digital output -XPX1:10 Twin legs down signal -B1 41 Digital input -XPX3:49 Twl lock CMD
-B1 18 Digital output -XPX1:20 Not connected -B1 42 Digital input -XPX3:48 Twl unlock CMD
-B1 19 Digital output -XPX1:30 Not connected -B1 43 Digital input -XPX3:47 G.p. move to left CMD
-B1 20 Digital output -XPX1:40 Not connected -B1 44 Digital input -XPX3:46 G.p. move to right CMD
-B1 21 Undefined -XPX1:46 Not connected -B1 45 Digital input -XPX3 :7 Twin legs up CMD
-B1 22 Undefined -XPX1:47 Not connected -B1 46 Digital input -XPX3 :9 Twin legs down CMD
-B1 23 Undefined -XPX1:49 Not connected -B1 47 Digital input -XPX3:50 Spreader stop
-B1 24 Undefined -XPX1:48 Not connected -B1 48 Digital input -XPX3:20 G.p. auto return
EH170
SCS² CANopen 31
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
I/0 OVERVIEW This drawing is copyright, and is

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
PLC diagram
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
32
52
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:34 or reproduced, whitout the written DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=) : PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
K2 Telescope Twl
-HL1 Twin legs down Locked
Gravity point retract lock
Unlocked left signal signal
to left CMD CMD
K3 Telescope Twl
-HL2 Not Unlocked
Gravity point expand unlock
Locked left connected signal
to right CMD CMD
K6 Flippers G.p.
-HL3 Not Spreader landed
Hydralic pump all up move to left
Landed left connected signal
left/right gable CMD CMD
K8 Flipper G.p.
-HL4 Not G.p. in centre
Retract waterside down move to right
Tower in center left connected signal
telescope CMD CMD
K9 Flipper Twin legs
-HL5 Not G.P. at left
Extend right down up
Unlocked right connected signal
telescope CMD CMD
K10 Flipper Twin legs
-HL6 Not G.P. at right
Hydraulic pump left down down
Locked right connected signal
twin CMD CMD
Flipper
-HL7 Not Not H.I.S Spreader
landside down
Landed right connected connected signal (option) stop
CMD
Not Not Not TTDS ok Not G.p.

connected connected connected signal (option) connected auto return
24VDC / Output 24VDC / Output 230VAC / Output 230VAC / Output 230VAC / Input 230VAC / Input
red red black black yellow yellow
24VDC / Output 24VDC / Output 230VAC / Output 230VAC / Input 230VAC / Input
red red black yellow yellow
24VDC / Output 230VAC / Output 230VAC / Input 24VDC / Input
red black yellow white
230VAC / Output 24VDC / Input
black white
XP1 XP2 XP3
-B1
EH170
SCS² CANopen 32
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
I/O card overview
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
33
52
bln PLANT (=) : PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
CAN-Open I/O
-X2 -X3
Left gable end Right gable end
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS

Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8 Pin Connector 7 Pin Connector 8
2 Spare 2 -Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre 2 Spare 2 -Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre
4 -S10 Landed left waterside 4 -Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre 4 -S12 Landed right landside 4 -Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre
Connector 5 Connector 6 Connector 5 Connector 6

2 Spare 2 -Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside 2 Spare 2 -Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside
4 -S9 Landed left landside 4 -Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside 4 -S11 Landed right waterside 4 -Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside

2 -S6 Locked left waterside 2 -Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside 2 -S8 Locked right landside 2 -Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside
4 -S2 Unlocked left waterside 4 -Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside 4 -S4 Unlocked right landside 4 -Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside

2 -S5 Locked left landside 2 -Y8 Twistlock lock left 2 -S7 Locked right waterside 2 -Y16 Twistlock lock right
4 -S1 Unlocked left landside 4 -Y7 Twistlock unlock left 4 -S3 Unlocked right waterside 4 -Y15 Twistlock unlock right
Module ID: 2 Module ID: 3
EH170
SCS² CANopen 33
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
I/O card overview
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
34
52
bln PLANT (=) :
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
CAN-Open I/O
-X4 -X5
Centre landside Centre waterside

2 -S39 Twin 4 up right landside 2 Spare 2 -S38 Twin 3 up right waterside 2 Spare
4 -S35 Twin 4 landed right landside 4 Spare 4 -S34 Twin 3 landed right waterside 4 Spare

2 -S31 Twin 4 locked right landside 2 Spare 2 -S30 Twin 3 locked right waterside 2 Spare
4 -S27 Twin 4 unlocked right landside 4 Spare 4 -S26 Twin 3 unlocked right waterside 4 Spare

2 -S36 Twin 1 up left landside 2 -Y28 Twin twistlock lock 2 -S37 Twin 2 up left waterside 2 Spare
4 -S32 Twin 1 landed left landside 4 -Y27 Twin twistlock unlock 4 -S33 Twin 2 landed left waterside 4 Spare

2 -S28 Twin 1 locked left landside 2 -Y26 Twin legs down 2 -S29 Twin 2 locked left waterside 2 Spare
4 -S24 Twin 1 unlocked left landside 4 -Y25 Twin legs up 4 -S25 Twin 2 unlocked left waterside 4 Spare
EH170
SCS² CANopen 34
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
I/O card overview
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
35
52
bln PLANT (=) :
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
CAN-Open I/O
-X8 -X10
Centre landside Centre waterside

2 -S114 30' telescope positon 2 Spare 2 Spare 2 Spare
4 -S14 30' telescope positon 4 Spare 4 -S84 High indication right (option) 4 Spare

2 -S16 40' telescope positon 2 Spare 2 Spare 2 Spare
4 -S13 20' telescope position 4 Spare 4 -S83 High indication left (option) 4 Spare

2 -S53 G.P tower right centre 2 Spare 2 -S42 Twin 3 down right waterside 2 Spare
4 -S52 G.P tower left centre 4 Spare 4 -S41 Twin 2 down left waterside 4 -HL10 Twin legs down waterside

2 -S55 GP tower right stop 2 Spare 2 -S43 Twin 4 down right landside 2 Spare
4 -S54 G.P tower left stop 4 Spare 4 -S40 Twin 1 down left landside 4 -HL9 Twin legs down landside
EH170
SCS² CANopen 35
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
I/O card overview
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
36
52
bln PLANT (=) :
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
CAN-Open I/O
-X13
Centre landside option

2 -S96 TTDS sensor 2 Spare 2 2

2 Spare 2 Spare 2 2


Module ID: 13 Module ID:
EH170
SCS² CANopen 36
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
I/O card overview
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
37
52
bln PLANT (=) :
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
Internal layout X1 cabinet EH170U A
Cable trunk is 30mm,

if nothing else is written
B
B1 B
290mm
XP1 XP2 XP3 Rubber boot
Distance between cable

trunk and edge 45mm
C Length 640mm C
X1
Length 115mm
/6.02 /6.04 /5.04 /5.07

/10.04 /10.01
Length 145mm
/10.03
740mm
-K6
-QM6 -QM7 -K8 -QM8 -K2
-QM1
PCU to mounted with
D heat transfer conpound D
Length 490mm
Length 380mm
G1
-F1 2A /5.09 -EH1
/7.01 /6.06
/7.02 /7.07 /10.06
10A
Power supply -F2
/5.09
-KA1 -K10
-K1 -QM10
-P1 X2
E E
15mm Width 60 mm/ Length 520mm
40mm
733mm
EH170
SCS² CANopen 37
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
38
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Cabinet layout TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
LAT PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:12 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-09 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
External cable connection X1 cabinet / EH170U
B B
GLANDS CABLE
1 PG11 EEPROM
2 M25 WM1
3 M25 Plug
4 M40 WXP1
5 - XP21
C C
6 - XP22
7 - XP23
5 2 7
6
4
D 1 D
E E
EH170
SCS² CANopen 38
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
39
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Cable/ Sensor Layout TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-04 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 . 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
GORETEX VENT PLUG GORETEX VENT PLUG

700984, 700985 700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside Assembly from the outside
B B
C C
Q1
D D
SB1
SS1
E E
EH170
SCS² CANopen 39
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
40
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Cabinet layout TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-04 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Junction box X100

A A
GLAND CABLE GLAND CABLE
1 M16 WX2 9 M16 WM3

B B
2 M16 WX3 10 M16 WM4
3 M16 WX4 11 M16 WM5
4 M16 WX5 12 M16 WHL 1-4
5 M16 WX8 13 M16 WHL 5-8
6 M16 WX10 14 M16 WXP22

C C
7 M16 15 M25
WX13 (OPTION) WXP21
8 M16 WM2 16 M32 WXP23
D D
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 14
16 5 6 7 12 13
E E
15
EH170
SCS² CANopen 40
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
41
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
External cable connection between X1, X100 cabinet / EH170U A
B B
CABINET WXP23
Part no. 1001865
X1
C C
CABINET
XP21
X100
XP23
XP22
D D
WXP21
Part no. 1001864
WXP22
Part no. 1001863
E E
EH170
SCS² CANopen 41
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
42
F
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-04 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
XP1
A A
X1 CABINET B1
B B
M1
H1 = GREEN
H2 = RED H8 = YELLOW
H3 = WHITE H7 = WHITE
H6 = RED
H4 = YELLOW
WATERSIDE H5 = GREEN
C H10 = BLUE C
S14, S114 30' POS.
S2 UNLOCK
2 X5 S3 UNLOCK 3
S6 LOCK X13 X10 S7 LOCK
GREEN S10 LANDED OPTION
S11 LANDED
GREEN
Y1-Y2 FLIPPER1 S13 20' POS.
Y3-Y4 FLIPPER2
Y5-Y6 FLIPPER5
Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK
6
X2 YELLOW
M3
D D
M4
5 M2 X3
BLUE
Y9-Y10 FLIPPER3
Y11-Y12 FLIPPER4
Y13-Y14 FLIPPER6
S16 40' POS.
Y15-Y16 TWISTLOCK
S1 UNLOCK S83 H.I.S X100 CABINET S84 H.I.S S4 UNLOCK
1 S5 LOCK OPTION X4 X8 OPTION S8 LOCK 4
S54 S52 S53 S55
E RED S9 LANDED
TOWER STOP TOWER LEFT
H9 = BLUE
TOWER STOP
S12 LANDED RED E
TOWER RIGHT
LEFT CENTRE CENTRE RIGHT
LEFT LANDSIDE RIGHT
EH170
SCS² CANopen 42
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
43
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Spreader layout TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
LANDSIDE WATERSIDE
B B
X1 CABINET X1 CABINET
C M1 M1 C
D D
S24 UNLOCK S27 UNLOCK S26 UNLOCK S25 UNLOCK

LEFT S28 LOCK S31 LOCK RIGHT RIGHT S30 LOCK S29 LOCK LEFT
S32 LANDED S35 LANDED S34 LANDED S33 LANDED
S36 TWIN UP S39 TWIN UP S38 TWIN UP S37 TWIN UP
S40 TWIN DOWN S43 TWIN DOWN S42 TWIN DOWN S41 TWIN DOWN
E E
EH170
SCS² CANopen 43
SHEET
- MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
44
F
- The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: Spreader layout TOTAL SH.
52
F
- DRAWN BY:
bln PLANT (=)
A1 PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-01-24 UNIT (+) :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA
X0 -BRAKE1 1 =A1+X1/5.08 79125 CURRENT RELAY SR15 SEW SEW SR15 8267626 BSR 150-500VAC M25
X0 -BRAKE1 1 =A1+X1/5.08 700026 GLAND ADAPTER LAPP MILTRONIC AB 12 67 42 12 67 42 SKINDICHT M32/M25
X0 -BRAKE2 1 =A1+X1/5.04 700026 GLAND ADAPTER LAPP MILTRONIC AB 12 67 42 12 67 42 SKINDICHT M32/M25
X0 -BRAKE2 1 =A1+X1/5.04 79125 CURRENT RELAY SR15 SEW SEW SR15 8267626 BSR 150-500VAC M25
X0 -HINK_X0 2 =A1+X1/6.05 1002018 PROTECTION COVER HTS ABB ABB 5DLN296350-A 5DLN296350-A SIZE4
X0 -HINK_X0 1 =A1+X1/6.05 1002520 PROTECTION COVER HTS ABB ABB 5DLN296350-C 5DLN296350-C SIZE1
X0 -HINK_X0 1 =A1+X1/6.05 1002602 CABLE AND ITEM MARKING FLEXIMARK MILTRONIC TWIN JIB
X0 -HINK_X0 1 =A1+X1/6.05 1002177 X1 cabinet EH170 ASSY BROMMA 1002177 Complete with SCS² for CAN open
X0 -HINK_X0 1 =A1+X1/6.05 1002607 CABLE AND ITEM MARKING FLEXIMARK MILTRONIC TOWER JIB
X0 -HINK_X0 1 =A1+X1/6.05 1002595 CABLE AND ITEM MARKING FLEXIMARK MILTRONIC END BEAM 3-FLIPPER
X0 -HL9 1 =A1+X0/27.01 1001403 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5813.B E5813.B 24VDC M12 BLUE
X0 -HL10 1 =A1+X0/27.03 1001403 LED LAMPS EKTA EKTA E5813.B E5813.B 24VDC M12 BLUE
X0 -R2 1 =A1+X0/16.09 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83
X0 -R3 1 =A1+X0/18.09 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83
X0 -S1 1 =A1+X0/16.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
EH170
SCS² CANopen 44
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
Part List This drawing is copyright, and is

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
Parts list: ( - )
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
45
52
LAT PLANT (=) : PLOTTED:
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
UNIT ITEM QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No. DENOMINATION MANUFACTURE SUPPLIER TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA
X0 -X2 1 =A1+X0/16.00 1001762 IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic CR9011 CR9011 8 in / 8 out
X0 -X4 2 =A1+X0/22.00 79282 GLAND PLUG MURR MILTRONIC AB ZVKM12 40 57 05 ASB BOX PLUGS M12
X0 -XP1 1 75618 SHRINK HOUSE 85/25 NELCO CONTACT NELCO CONTACT MWTM-85/25-1000/172
X0 -XP1 1 74410 INSERT 37P (M) ODU ODU GUNNAR PETTERSON AB 309 803 150 037 151 309 803 150 037 151 ODU 309 37 POL MALE
X0 -XP1 1 73272 GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm LAPP MILTRONIC AB SKINDICHT-SR 42/35 12 02 35
X0 -XP1 1 70592 PLUG ODU 309 LOCK RING ODU GUNNAR PETTERSON AB 309 021 018 200 000 309 021 018 200 000 309 021 018 200 000
X0 -XP1 1 71480 PLUG ODU 309 ODU GUNNAR PETTERSON AB 309.021.000.554 309.021.000.554 EXCL.Lock ring IP56 PG42
X0 -XP1 2 73983 CRIMPING HOSE NELCO
EH170
SCS² CANopen 45
MACHINE TYPE: SHEET
Part List This drawing is copyright, and is

SERIAL NO.
CHECKED BY:
-
Parts list: ( - )
CONT.
TOTAL SH.
46
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
FROM PIN No. CABLE CORE TO TERMINAL No. TYPE ART. NR. QTY SHEET
X0 -HL9 1 -WHL9 4 X10 -XP2 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M M12 2xANGLE 701008 1 =A1+X0/27.01
X0 -HL10 1 -WHL10 4 X10 -XP4 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M M12 2xANGLE 79295 1 =A1+X0/27.03
X0 -HL1 2 -WHL 1-4 1 X100 -X1 :14 LED LAMPS 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 1001883 1 =A1+X1/9.01
X100 -X1 :14 -WHL 5-8 1 X0 -HL5 2 LED LAMPS 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 1001883 1 =A1+X1/9.05
X0 -M1 U -WM1 1 X1 -X2 :1 CABLE 4x2,5mm² PUR 70996 5 =A1+X1/5.07
X0 -M1 V -WM1 2 X1 -X2 :2 CABLE 4x2,5mm² PUR 70996 5 =A1+X1/5.07
X0 -M1 W -WM1 3 X1 -X2 :3 CABLE 4x2,5mm² PUR 70996 5 =A1+X1/5.07
X0 -M1 PE -WM1 PE X1 -X2 :PE CABLE 4x2,5mm² PUR 70996 5 =A1+X1/5.07
X2 -XP5 4 -WS9 4 X0 -S9 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0M M12 2xANGLE 79293 1 =A1+X0/16.05
Cable List SCS² CANopen

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
46
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
47
The design and/or constructions CHECKED BY: CABLE LIST TOTAL SH.
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
X10 -XP5 4 -WS83 4 X0 -S83 4 =A1+X0/26.05
X10 -XP7 4 -WS84 4 X0 -S84 4 =A1+X0/26.07
X13 -XP5 4 -WS94 4 X0 -S94 4 =A1+X0/28.05
X0 -S1 4 -WS1-S5 4 X2 -XP1 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m M12 Twin cable Prox. 79903 1 =A1+X0/16.01
X0 -S13 4 -WS13-S16 4 X8 -XP5 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M M12 Twin cable Prox. 700960 1 =A1+X0/20.05

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
47
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
48
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
X0 -S40 4 -WS40-S43 4 X10 -XP1 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 4,5M M12 Twin cable prox. 1002387 1 =A1+X0/26.01
X0 -S91 4 -WS90-S91 2 X13 -XP1 2 =A1+X0/28.02
X0 -S90 4 -WS90-S91 4 X13 -XP1 4 =A1+X0/28.01
X0 -S93 4 -WS92-S93 2 X13 -XP3 2 =A1+X0/28.04
X0 -S92 4 -WS92-S93 4 X13 -XP3 4 =A1+X0/28.03
X0 -S96 4 -WS95-S96 2 X13 -XP7 2 =A1+X0/28.08
X0 -S95 4 -WS95-S96 4 X13 -XP7 4 =A1+X0/28.07
X2 -X0 :1 -WX2 white X100 -X1 :15 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 16 =A1+X1/8.01
X2 -X0 :2 -WX2 brown X100 -X1 :22 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 16 =A1+X1/8.01
X2 -X0 :5 -WX2 red X100 -X1 :1 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 16 =A1+X1/8.00
X2 -X0 :3 -WX2 blue X100 -X1 :8 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 16 =A1+X1/8.01

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
48
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
49
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
X0 -XP1 1 -WXP1 1 X1 -X2 :L1 CABLE 37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX 701222 7 =A1+X1/5.00
X0 -XP1 3 -WXP1 3 X1 -X2 :109 CABLE 37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX 701222 7 =A1+X1/11.01

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
49
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
50
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
X0 -XP1 33 -WXP1 33 X1 -X2 :PE CABLE 37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX 701222 7 =A1+X1/5.02
X0 -XP1 37 -WXP1 PE X1 -X2 :PE CABLE 37x2,5mm² NEOFLEX 701222 7 =A1+X1/5.02
X1 -XP21 1 -WXP21 1 X100 -X1 :7 CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END 12x2,5mm² PUR 1001864 1 =A1+X1/8.06
X1 -XP22 2 -WXP22 White X100 -X1 :15 CABLE 7POL CONTACT-OPEN END 3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn 1001863 1 =A1+X1/8.01
X1 -XP22 3 -WXP22 Brown X100 -X1 :22 CABLE 7POL CONTACT-OPEN END 3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn 1001863 1 =A1+X1/8.01
X1 -XP23 1 -WXP23 1 X100 -X2 :1 CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END 25x1,5mm² PUR 1001865 1 =A1+X1/6.02

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
50
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
51
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
X1 -XP23 20 -WXP23 20 X100 -X2 :PE CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END 25x1,5mm² PUR 1001865 1 =A1+X1/6.06
X1 -XP23 PE -WXP23 PE X100 -X2 :PE CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END 25x1,5mm² PUR 1001865 1 =A1+X1/6.04
X0 -Y2 1 -WY1-Y2 B X2 -XP4 2 CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC 700970 1 =A1+X0/17.04
X0 -Y1 1 -WY1-Y2 A X2 -XP4 4 CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC 700970 1 =A1+X0/17.03
B1 -XPX2 :10 -KEY1 WH B1 -XPX2 :9 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² 38905 1 =A1+X1/15.03
B1 -XPX2 :9 -KEY1 BN B1 -XPX2 :39 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² 38905 1 =A1+X1/15.04
B1 -XPX2 :39 -KEY1 GN B1 -XPX2 :49 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² 38905 1 =A1+X1/15.04

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
51
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
52
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
B1 -XPX2 :50 -WXP22 white X1 -XP22 2 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 1 =A1+X1/15.06
B1 -XPX2 :20 -WXP22 brown X1 -XP22 3 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 1 =A1+X1/15.06
X0 -E2 -WXP22 Sheild X1 -WXP22 CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 1001860 1 =A1+X1/15.06

MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 SHEET
52
SERIAL NO.
- CONT.
52
2005-02-10 10:13 DRAWING NO. REV.

DRAWING DATE:
2005-02-10 UNIT (+) : FILENAME: 1002493 a
11 • Fault finding diagnostics
Fault finding in hydraulic system

NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT
• Check oil level and that filter is clean.
• Check that pump is functioning correctly as illustrated in the "system test".
• Particularly check that setting of pressure relief valves are correct (as
enclosed sheet) and that the pump suction line (inlet) is not blocked.
• Pump suction is checked by removing drain line and measuring flow at
running pressure of 100 BAR.
• Maximum flow should be 1 litre/min. If greater than this, replace the pump.
TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE

• Check manual operation of the solenoid valve.
• If twistlocks work then check electrical supply & solenoid.
NOTE! Blockading pin must be in the "up" position!
IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK

• Check that pump pressure is correct.
• Check pressure relief valve.
• When valve is operated manually the pressure should remain at working
pressure. If it decreases check the seals in the cylinder.
• Remove the cylinder and ensure that the twistlocks are free to rotate.
• Check directional valve.

rev.
Fault finding in electrical system
HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED
Possible cause Action______________ ____
• 3 phase supply missing. • Check cable, plug, socket.
• Motor contactor not functioning. • Check crane control signal.
• Feed from crane missing. • Check connection.
HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT

Possible cause Action________________ __
• Pump pressure too high or pump faulty. • Refer to Hydraulic section.
• Pump motor faulty. • Change motor.
• Motor supply has one missing phase. • Check to find where supply is
connected and repair.
TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK

Possible cause__________________ Action________________ __
• Pumps stopped. • Check pump procedure.
• Crane spreader is fitted with the safety • Check that the spreader is correctly
feature − only work with all four landing landed on the container.
switches actuated.
• If timer fitted − timer faulty set wrongly. • Replace or set to 0,5 or 2 sec.
• Check if fault is hydraulic by • Refer to hydraulic section.
operating valve by hand.
• Check supply to solenoid − if yes. • Replace solenoid.
• Check leads and plugs to solenoids. • Repair or replace
• Check blockading circuit. • Check relays, check limit switch and
adjust or replace. Check connection.
• Check supply at B and C junction boxes. • Check connections. Replace main
supply cable.
FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE

Possible cause Action________________ __
• Pump stopped. • Check pump procedure.
• Check if fault is mechanical or hydraulic • Carry out mechanical hydraulic
by operating valve by hand. procedure.
• Check supply to solenoid − if yes. • Replace solenoid.
• Check flipper supplies from crane. • Check crane controls. Check plugs,
socket and cable.

rev.
12 • Appendices
Units & conversion tables

LENGTH
1 ft = 0,3048 m
1m = 3,2808 ft
1 in = 25,4 mm
1 mm = 0,03937 in
WEIGHT
1 lb = 0,4536 kg
1 kg = 2,2046 lb
1 ton = 1 t = 2000 lb = 907 kg = 0,893 Lt= 0,907 tonne
1 Lt = 2240 lb = 1016 kg = 1,016 tonne = 1,120 ton
1 tonne = 1 mT = 2204 lb = 1000 kg = 0,9842 Lt = 1,103 ton
VOLUME
1l = 0,21997 UKgal = 0,26417 USgal
PRESSURE
1 bar = 10 N/cm2 = 1,02 Kp/cm2 = 14,503 lbf/in2
POWER
1 Hp = 0,746 kW
1 kW = 1,341 Hp
TORQUE
1 Kpm = 9,81 Nm = 7,233 lbf
FORCE
1 Kgf = 1 kp = 9,81 N = 2,2046 lbf
TEMPERATURE
dgr C = 5 • (dgr F-32)
9
A = ampere l = litre
o
C = degrees centigrade lb = pound
c/s = cycles per second lbf= pound force
o
F = degrees Fahrenheit m = meter
ft = foot min= minute
gal = gallon n = newton
Hp = horse power s = second
Hz = hertz t = tonne
in = inch v = volt
kg = kilogramme w = watt
Kgf = kilopond force µm = micron

rev.
Hydraulic symbols

rev.
Electrical symbols

rev.
OPERATION AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE FOR THE
BROMMA
TWIN TWENTY
DETECTION SYSTEM
(TTDS)
MARCH 2001
Revised APRIL 2002
BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide

Revised April 2002 1
Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)
Table of Content
Introduction................................................................................................... 3
System Description........................................................................................................ 3
Sensing The Gap Between Containers ........................................................................ 6
Detecting a Container ................................................................................................... 6
Sensor Settings............................................................................................................... 7
Interface with Spreader and Crane Control............................................................... 8
Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass ................................................................................ 10
Maintenance................................................................................................................. 10
False Signals................................................................................................................. 10
Functional Description................................................................................................ 11
Limitations................................................................................................... 13
Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty
Detection System (TTDS)........................................................................... 14
Operation Mode Setting.............................................................................................. 14
Distance Setting ........................................................................................................... 14
Indication Lights ......................................................................................................... 14
Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System............................................ 16
Wiring .......................................................................................................... 17
Pin Layout.................................................................................................... 18
Spares ........................................................................................................... 19
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 20
Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System........................... 20
Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor ........................... 23
Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC) ...... 24
Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller.................................................. 25
Procedure to Checking Sensor ................................................................................... 27

Introduction
System Description
The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is designed to sense the existence of two-
twenty foot containers in a forty foot ship’s cell by detecting the gap between the two containers
or the sagging of the two containers. The twin twenty detection system is a tool to assist the
operator in detecting the dangerous situation of two twenty foot containers under a spreader
positioned in the 40 foot position.
The majority of twin twenty conditions consist of two typical containers, although there are
several other variables to consider. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System was designed
to detect as many types of flatrack and tank containers as possible without unnecessarily shutting
down operations.
Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a seven sensor cluster to avoid many of the false
indications that plague other twin twenty detection systems. Many twin twenty detection systems
cannot differentiate between a twin twenty condition and an open top container, canvas tops, tank
container, and lifts with overheights. The Bromma twin twenty detection system is designed to
give a “go” signal during these lifts. By reducing the amount of false twin twenty indications that
need to be bypassed, Bromma can offer a more reliable and productive system.
The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a cluster of seven photoelectric sensors
located in the center of the main frame. See Figure 1. The five inner sensors are used to locate a
gap between two containers. The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, along with the two outer
sensors on the center cluster, S90 and S94 are used to detect the existence of the containers. The
system can detect a 38mm (1-1/2”) gap with a range of plus or minus 28mm (1-1/8”) from the
center of the spreader.
The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System can also detect an unsafe twin twenty lift even is
the containers where butted together and there was no gap. The idea is based on the fact that an
unsafe twin twenty lift will lift the ends of the containers that are locked on to the spreader and
ends at the center will not be lifted. By setting the outer sensors lower than the inner sensors,
there will be an area where the TTDS will send an unsafe twin twenty lift even when no gap
exists. When the outer ends of the container are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the
TTDS go permissive will be switched off. The outer sensors should still detect the presence of
the containers. The TTDS will interrupt the go permissive until the spreader is lifted beyond the
range of the outer sensors. This means when the twistlocks are locked and the TTDS senses an
unsafe lift, the hoisting should stop. Figure 2 shows the condition where the twistlock are locked
and the outer ends of the containers are being lifted, but the ends at the center are not. The TTDS
will determine that this condition is an unsafe twin twenty lift and discontinue the go permissive.
Figure 3 show a typical unsafe twin twenty lift that will be detected by the TTDS.

Figure 1

Figure 2
Figure 3

The Bromma TTDS can be mounted anywhere along the center of the spreader. It is
recommended that the TTDS be mounted inside the main frame for maximum protection.
The twin twenty detection system is designed so a failure of a sensor will not cause the system to
fail and send a "go" signal during a twin twenty condition. Because the definition of a gap is two
or more sensors, the system will not shut down if one of the gap sensors fails. The system will
become more sensitive to a twin twenty condition. A failure is defined by a failure of the sensor,
the relay wired to the sensor, or a loose connection.
The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is not intended nor will it detect all
possible twin twenty conditions. The Limitation Section outlines the situations where the twin
twenty detection system may give a false twin twenty indication or fail to give an indication.
Sensing The Gap Between Containers

The Bromma TTDS can detect a minimum of 38mm (1-1/2”) gap between the containers. The
Bromma TTDS defines a gap as two or more consecutive sensors not detecting an obstruction in
their view path. Two consecutive sensors are used to define a gap to avoid false readings due to
damage or variations of the containers.
The center of the gap between containers does not have to fall in the center of the spreader. The
spreader could be as much as 28 mm (1-1/8”) from the center of the gap due to the spreader being
landed toward one end of the container, floating twistlocks, or the flexibility of the spreader. For
this reason, the gap sensing cluster is made up of five sensors to achieve a plus or minus 28mm
(1-1/8”) range. Because of the physical size of the sensors, the sensors are mounted in two rows.
The two rows are staggered so any one sensor is halfway between the sensors before and after.
Detecting a Container
The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, of the twin twenty detection system are the primary sensors
for detecting the existence of a container. The two outer sensors of the gap cluster, sensors S90
and S94, are used as secondary container sensors for tank containers and flat racks. If these four
sensors do not detect a container, the twin twenty detection system will allow the container to be
locked and lifted. This situation will occur on forty foot open top containers or loose fitting
canvas topped containers.
If any of the four container sensing sensors detects a container, the control is transferred to the
gap sensing sensors. If two consecutive sensors do not detect the container, the TTDS will not
give the “go” permissive.
The two outer sensors, S90 and S95, are located 114mm (4-1/2”) from the center of the spreader
to ensure that two twenty foot containers are detected no matter where they are in the ship cell.

Sensor Settings
The inner sensors should be set low enough to detect sagging canvas tops but not too low where it
will detect the load in an open top container. It is a known fact that two twenty foot containers
can be lifted in a cell by a spreader in single container mode. The bottom of the containers will
ride the cell guide and allow the crane to lift the two containers. Once the containers leave the
cell, the ends at the center will drop and in most cases the container will fall. Even in the cells the
ends of the container at the center will be lower in relation to the ends attached to the spreader.
The inner sensors must be set so they go from high to low state in the event that two twenty foot
containers are lifted in the cells.
When two twenty foot containers are lifted in a cell, the end of the container at the center will be
5.4 inches [137 mm] lower than the ends supported by the spreader. To ensure that the inner
sensors do not detect the container in this configuration, the inner sensors should be set so that the
range is 5 1/4 inches [133.4 mm] below the twistlock housings. Deflection of the spreader and
the 9/16 inch [14 mm] difference between the seated and the loaded position will ensure that the
inner sensor will not detect the container if this condition occurs. Since the TTDS is located in
different positions and the sensors are not mounted at the same elevation, it is best to set the
sensors based on the bottom of the main beam. The type of spreader will determine the range of
the inner sensors. See Table 1 for recommended inner sensor settings for different spreaders.
Since the spreader will travel lower than the theoretical spreader height when it is landed on a
container, the inner sensors will extend approximately 7 inches [178 mm] past the top of the
container when the spreader is landed. On all but canvas top containers, this engagement should
be adequate. The amount of the sag in the canvas top will determine if a canvas top container
will give a false indication.
In the case where an unsafe twin twenty lift occurs outside the cells, the ends at the center will not
be lifted. This means the outer sensors need to be set so that once the go permissive has been
interrupted, the hoist should stop before the containers are lifted out of the range of the outer
sensors. On faster cranes where the stopping distance is too long, logic in the crane should be
added to watch for the interruption of the go permissive with the twistlock locked and the
spreader not landed. Once a predetermined time period without the go permissive has been
reached with the twistlock locked, the hoist should be stopped, even if the go permissive returns.
When the containers have been lifted high enough the outer sensors will no longer be able to
detect the containers and the go permissive will be given. Bromma recommend a sensor setting
of 12 inches [305 mm] greater than the inner sensors. The stopping distance of the crane will
determine if additional crane logic will be needed. The difference between the inner sensor
setting and the outer sensor setting needs to be greater than the stopping distance of the crane, or
additional crane logic will be needed to properly detect the unsafe twin twenty condition. If the
settings are less than the stopping distance of the crane, the hoist will be interrupted and then the
hoist will coast until the containers are outside the range of the outer sensors then the go
permissive will be given and the hoist will be able to rise again. Only a pause will be seen.
See Table 1 for recommended outer sensor settings for different spreaders.

Table 1 Sensor Settings for Different Spreaders
Inner Sensor Setting Outer Sensor Setting

Type of Spreader (Inches from Bottom of (Inches from Bottom
Main Beam) of Main Beam)
[Millimeters] [Millimeters]
New Type ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 16 28
(12 1/4” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) [405 mm] [710 mm]
AST-6SCH 15 1/8” 27 1/8”
(12 1/4” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) [384 mm] [689 mm]
Old Style ASX-7 and BSL-6 13 ¼ 25 ¼
(9 ½” from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) [337 mm] [640 mm]
ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 Spreaders with INRS 18 30
Gable Ends [457 mm] [762 mm]
AST-6SCH 17 1/8” 29 1/8”
with INRS Gable Ends [435 mm] [740 mm]
SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Standard 16 ¾ 28 ¾”
Gable ends (6 3/4” [172 mm] from Bottom T/L Housing to [425 mm] [730 mm]
Gable Tube)
SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Bromma 22 3/8” 34 3/8”
Classic Gable ends (12 3/4” [342 mm] from Bottom T/L [568 mm] [873 mm]
Housing to Gable Tube)
SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 23 7/8” 35 7/8”
with INRS Gable Ends [606 mm] [911 mm]
Interface with Spreader and Crane Control

The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System should be tied into the spreader position circuit to
deactivate the system when the spreader is in the 20 or 45 foot position. In the case of a twin
twenty spreader, the system should also be tied into the center housing down circuit so the system
is deactivated when the housings are down. The TTDS should be tied into the hoisting circuit. In
the event the system is fooled by a small gap between the containers, the twistlocks can be locked
and the containers could be lifted. As the two containers are lifted, the outer ends of the container
are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the TTDS go permissive will be switched off.
The hoist should then stop, only if the system is tied into the locked hoist permit. The twin
twenty detection indication should not affect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the
twistlocks.
The stopping distance of the crane determines if the hoisting of the container will stop within the
range of the outer sensors. The stopping distance of the crane is based on a number of
parameters, acceleration rate, deceleration rate and the hoist speed. Since each crane is set up
differently, testing the actual crane may be the only way to determine if the 12 inches [305 mm]
difference between the inner and outer sensors will be enough to stop the hoist. A test to
determine if only the difference in sensor settings will be enough to stop the hoist is described
below.

On faster cranes the sensor settings may not be enough to stop the hoist. When the TTDS is
fooled by the two containers butted together and the two containers are lifted, the go permissive
will be interrupted, but since the crane can not stop quickly, the spreader will be lifted passed the
range of the outer sensors and the go permissive will be sent again. If no other logic is in the
crane PLC, the hoist will start again. To avoid this, one of the two crane logic options should be
added to the PLC.
• The first option would be to place TTDS latching logic to stop the hoist and keep it
stopped if the go permissive is interrupted for a half a second to one second when the
twistlocks are locked. The only way to hoist would be to cycle the twistlocks to the
unlock position or active the Twin Twenty Detection bypass. The TTDS latching logic
would need to be added in the PLC. It should be noted that is not a good idea to stop the
hoist and keep it stopped based on just the interruption of the go permissive. As the
spreader is landing or the containers are lifted, the TTDS will interrupt the go permissive
momentarily as the sensors adjust to a different status. The interruption of the go
permissive should be continuous over a period of time from 0.5 to 1 seconds.
• The second option would be to keep the hoist in slowdown mode for 2 second after lifting
the containers. This would allow the hoist to be stopped within the range of the outer
sensors.
Testing the Stopping Distance of the Crane
The following test can be done to check if the TTDS sensor setting and crane controls are
properly set to stop an unsafe twin twenty lift.
The first test should be performed without addition TTDS latching logic in the PLC to check if
the sensor settings would be all that is necessary.
• Properly set the TTDS sensors.

• Place two empty twenty foot containers on the ground so that the ends are butted
together.
• Land the spreader on the containers with the center housings up.
• Tape a large piece of cardboard (18” by 24”) to the top of the containers directly under
the TTDS sensors.
• Lock the twistlocks to the outside ends of the containers.
• The operator should lift the containers at full stick. (Note: The containers should only be
lifted about two to three feet)
• If the TTDS is set properly and the proper hoist interrupts are in place, the TTDS will
stop the hoist and it should remain stopped.
• Activate the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass to see if it is working properly.
• Check to see if the crane can hoist the containers with the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass
active. (Only lift the containers slightly).
If the test properly stops the hoisting of the containers, repeat the test two more times. If all three
attempts are successfully, then additional logic in the PLC is not needed.

If any of the attempts fail to stop the hoist, the TTDS latching logic or the hoist slowdown needs
to be included in the PLC logic and the test should be repeated. If the TTDS latching logic is
used, start with a timer set for 1 second. Continue to reduce the time setting until the TTDS
properly stops the hoisting of the containers.
Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass

Since there is a possibility that the TTDS will indicate a twin twenty condition when it is landed
on a forty foot container or flat rack, the system must be equipped with a method to override the
system. To do this, a twin twenty bypass should be placed either on the crane or on the spreader.
The bypass should be keyed and only operated by authorized maintenance personnel. The bypass
should be used only after the situation has been checked thoroughly. When the twin twenty
bypass is activated, an audible alarm should be sounded to warn the workers that the bypass is
active. It is the customer’s responsibility to determine if a twin twenty condition exists when the
bypass is activated.
Maintenance
Normal maintenance of the system includes testing the system according to the Testing the Twin
Twenty Detection System Section (attached) and cleaning the lenses. The operation of the system
should be checked at every maintenance period to ensure the proper operation of the system. The
lenses should also be cleaned at every maintenance period. The sensor will become more
sensitive as the lens become dirty and the system will indicate a twin twenty condition where
there is none.
False Signals
Some ports have encounter false twin twenty indications during heavy rains. A puddle can form
directly beneath the sensor cluster and the wind and rain can produce ripple in the puddle. The
reflective nature of the puddle and the ripples abnormally disperses the light from the sensors,
leading to the TTDS indicating a twin twenty condition. The system should be bypassed until the
container is unloaded.

Functional Description
The twin twenty detection system (TTDS) is designed to stop the twistlocks from locking if a
twin twenty condition is detected. The system is also tied into the locked hoist permissive to stop
the hoist if the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked. The twin twenty detection signal
should only stop the twistlocks from locking when the spreader is in the 40 foot position or the
position of the spreader is unknown and the center housings are up. A keyed bypass switch
labeled TWIN TWENTY DETECTION BYPASS, should be installed in a convenient location to
bypass the twin twenty detection system. The bypass should only be used after the twin twenty
situation has been checked. An alarm should sound when the bypass switch is activated to warn
the worker that a bypass is active.
The crane logic must contain the following interlocks for proper use of the TTDS:
• The crane logic must block the operator from locking the twistlocks when a TTDS go
permissive is not given.
• The crane logic must block the operator from hoisting the spreader and container when the
twistlocks are locked and a TTDS go permissive is not given.
The TTDS is bypassed under certain condition and a TTDS “go” permissive will be sent from the
spreader. The logic in the crane should also include the bypasses to mimic the spreader. The
valid TTDS “go” permissives that need to be supplied by the crane logic are as follows.
Valid TTDS “go” permissives supplied by crane control:
• Spreader in 20 foot position.
• Spreader in 45 foot position.
• Center Housings are down.
• The Twin Twenty Detection Bypass is activated
The twin twenty detection indication should not affect anything when the spreader is in the 20 or
45 foot position, the twistlocks are unlocked or the center housings are down. The twin twenty
detection indication should not effect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the
twistlocks.
If the twin twenty detection indication effects the lowering of the hoist, then the crane may be
stuck in a position it cannot recover. If the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked, the
TTDS can sense the sagging of the container at the center of the spreader and interrupt the “go”
permissive and stop the hoist. Without the ability to lower the spreader and unlock the twistlocks,
the containers will be stuck partial lifted.

If the twin twenty detection indication effects the hoisting of the crane with the twistlocks
unlocked, the operator will not be able to raise the spreader to put down the center housing or the
spreader will not be able to be removed to check to see if there are two twenty foot containers.
Both of these conditions can be overcome using the twin twenty indication bypass, but frequent
use of the bypass will be a nuisance. If the use of the bypass becomes routine, then the operator
may use the bypass when there is a twin twenty condition just out of habit. Bromma strongly
recommends that each twin twenty occurrence be thoroughly checked before the bypass is used.
The logic for the twin twenty detection system is contained on the spreader. The logic on the
spreader should be imitated in the PLC. The logic must be installed and maintained to ensure the
safe operation of the spreader.
There may be a momentary loss of the twin twenty detection permissive during the landing of the
container as the photosensors adjust to their new status.

Limitations
The limitations of the twin twenty detection system are (see Figure 4):
1. There must be a 1-1/2 inch gap between the containers where the twin twenty detection
system is sensing.
2. There must be a support between the end corner castings near the top of the container or flat
rack. The support must be at least 3 inches thick and the side of the support cannot be more
than 2 inches from the end of the corner castings.
3. The maximum recess along the top of a container between the corner castings is 2".
4. The twin twenty detection system has given false twin twenty indications during heavy rains.
Figure 4

Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin

Twenty Detection System (TTDS)
Use the attached Figure 5 as reference
Operation Mode Setting

1. The operation mode screw is mounted on the front face of the sensor.
2. Rotate the mode screw to D for Dark On or to L for Light On.
3. Photoelectric Sensors S90 thru S94 are set Light On. Photoelectric Sensors S95 and 96 are
set Dark On.
Distance Setting
1. Determine the type of spreader. Using Table 1, find the settings for the inner and outer
sensors for the spreader.
2. Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- ¼ inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the
main beam for setting the inner sensors.
3. Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the inner sensors until the photoelectric
sensor is activated.
4. Repeat the procedure until all five inner photoelectric sensors are set.
5. Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- ¼ inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the
main beam for setting the outer sensors.
6. Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the outer sensors until the photoelectric
sensor is activated.
7. Repeat the procedure until both the outer photoelectric sensors are set.
Indication Lights
The green indicating light is illuminated when there is a stable light or dark condition.
The red indicating light is illuminated when the output is active.

Figure 5

Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System

Items in parenthesis are for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only
Accepted
Description (Initials) Date
Check each sensor individually to see if the green LED lights on each
sensor are illuminated.
Check each sensor individually to see that the red LED lights changes state
when an object is place 6 inches below the sensor.
With the twistlocks unlocked, (the center housings up) and the spreader in
the 40-foot position, place an object about 6 inches below all the sensors.
The LED lights on each sensor should be checked to make sure the sensor is
tripped. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not
light.
Clear the area 20 inches under the sensors. With the twistlocks unlocked,
the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot
position, check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock
and the twin twenty light should not light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and
the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6”
directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will
lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light.
directly below the other outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will
lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light.
directly below all of the sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock.
The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light.
directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will
lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housing up) and
spreader in the 45-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly
below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock.
With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, the center housing down and
spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6” directly
below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock.
(This step is for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only)

Wiring
Figure 6 shows the typical wiring scheme for the TTDS. See the electrical schematic of the
spreader to determine the actual wiring.
Figure 6

Pin Layout
10 m
Male Socket on TTDS Main Cable with Plug
The following is the pin layout for the main cable.
Wire No. Pin No. Function

1 A Power
2 B Neutral
YL/GR C Equipment Ground
3 D Common Supply Relay 1
4 E TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.)
5 F TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.)
6 G Common Supply Relay 2
7 H TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.)
8 I TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.)
9 J Fault Override (115 VAC)

Spares
The following is a list of typical spares. See the electrical wiring diagram of the spreader to
determine the actual parts used.
Part No. Description

38272 Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 120 VAC
38273 Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 220 VAC
38271 Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 24 VDC
38274 Main Cable
RST3RKWT4/3-631/.6M Cable Between TTDC and Sensors
UZD355A Photoelectric Sensor

Troubleshooting
Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System
This procedure is used for Twin Twenty Detection Systems with the Bromma TTDS controller
another procedure is used to troubleshoot the TTDS with relays.
Position the spreader so it is raised at least three (3) feet from the ground in the area of the twin
twenty detection system. There will be one relay mounted in the main junction box that is the
“go” permissive for the twin twenty detection system. Check the electrical schematic for the
spreader to determine the relay number for the “go” permissive. For this document, the “go”
permissive relay will be called R100. When Relay 100 is powered, the go permissive is given. If
Relay 100 is not on, then the twin twenty detection system is indicating a twin twenty condition.
See Figure 1 for the sensor configuration.
Check to see that the cables number corresponds to the sensor number. See Figure 1 for the
sensor configuration. Cable S90 is on sensor S90, Cable S91 is on sensor S91, Cable S92
is on sensor S92, Cable S93 is on sensor S93, Cable S94 is on sensor S94, Cable S95 is on
sensor S95 and Cable S96 is on sensor S96.
• Reconnect the cables to the proper sensors if the cabling is not correct.
When there is no object under the sensor cluster, the green LED lights should be lit on all
the sensors. The red LED light should be illuminated on sensors S95 and S96. The LED
light on Relay 100 should be illuminated.
• If the green LED light on some sensors is not illuminated and illuminated on other
sensors, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the sensor may be bad or the controller
may be bad. First, check the sensor according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking
Sensors”. If the sensor is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the
attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad,
replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin
Twenty Detection System Controller.”
• If none of the green LED lights on the sensors are illuminated, the cable to the TTDS
controller may be bad or the controller is bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS
controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS
Controller”. If the wiring is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the
attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”
Place masking tape over the face of the outside sensor S95. The red LED light should go
off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate.
• If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached,
“Procedure For Checking Sensors”.

• If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the
cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the
wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking
Cable to TTDS Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the
cable to the bad sensor according the attached, “Procedure For Checking Sensor
Cable”. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to
the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.”
Remove the masking tape from sensor S95. Place masking tape over the face of sensor
S96. The red LED light should go off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate.
• If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached,
Place the masking tape back onto sensor S95, then individually add masking tape to sensors
S90, S91, S92, S93 and S94. When the tape is placed on the sensor, the red LED light on
the sensor should illuminate.
• If the red LED light does not illuminate, check the sensor according to the attached,
After all the sensors have been covered. The LED light on Relay 100 should illuminate.
• If the LED light in Relay R100 does not illuminate, the cable to the TTDS controller
may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS
controller according to the attached, “Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS
Controller”. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad replace the TTDS
controller according to the attached, “Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection
System Controller.”
Check the logic in the TTDS controller by removing the tape from two sensors. See the list
below for the proper pair of sensors. The LED light in Relay 100 should go out. If the
LED light in Relay 100 goes out, replace the tape and uncover the next pair.
Sensors S90 and S91

Sensors S91 and S92
Sensors S92 and S93
Sensors S93 and S94

If everything has worked properly to this point and the system is still not functioning
properly on the spreader, check the wirings to the relay according to the attached
“Procedure to Check the Wiring to the “Go” Permissive Relay

Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor

Remove the sensor cluster from the spreader by removing the bottom locknuts on the
cluster shock mounts (See Figure 1).
Remove cluster from mounting brackets.
Remove screws and wiring from sensor. The sensors are held in place by two screws.
Separate the bad sensors from the other sensors. Note the location of sensors in cluster.
Unscrew the sensor cable form the sensor.
Reinstall the sensor cable onto the new sensor.
Reinstall the sensor back into the cluster and make sure all sensors are back in their proper
order.
Place the sensor cluster back on the support brackets and replace the shock mount nuts.
Set the new sensor according to “Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma
Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)”
Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to “Procedure to Trouble Shoot Twin-
Twenty Detection System”.

Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC)

Disconnect the cables to the sensors at the TTDC.
Disconnect the main cable to the TTDC.
Remove the nut holding the TTDC.
Remove the TTDC.
Place the new TTDC on the shock mounts.
Reinstall the nut on the shock mounts.
Reinstall the main cable to the TTDC.
Reinstall the sensor cable to the TTDC. Make sure the cables are connected to the proper
connections.
Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to “Procedure to Trouble Shoot Twin-
Twenty Detection System”.

Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller

Before checking the cable, check all the connections of the cable to the terminal strips.
Look for loose screws, bad crimps and frayed strands.
• If any bad connections are found, repair and retest the TTDS
If a spare cable is available, temporarily wire the cable in the junction box. Disconnect the
existing cable and plug in the spare cable. Retest the TTDS.
• If the TTDS operates properly, then replace the existing cable. If the TTDS is not
functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and follow the Procedure to Trouble
Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.
If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC with the power off. Turn
on the power. Carefully with a voltmeter meter, place one probe on Pin A and the other to
Pin B. The voltmeter meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115 VAC or 220
VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage.
• If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the
proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem
in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the
cable.
If the meter reads the proper voltage, Carefully with an voltmeter meter, place one probe on
Pin G and the other to Pin B. The ohm meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115
VAC or 220 VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage.
• If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the
proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem
in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the
cable.
If the meter reads the proper voltage, remove the power on the spreader. With the ohm
meter set to check for continuity, check each of the wires for continuity. The following
chart shows the pin out for the cable.
Wire No. Pin No. Function

1 A Power
2 B Neutral
YL/GR C Equipment Ground
3 D Common Supply Relay 1
4 E TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.)
5 F TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.)
6 G Common Supply Relay 2
7 H TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.)

8 I TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.)

9 J Fault Override (115 VAC)
• If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.
If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the
cause of the problem.

Procedure to Checking Sensor

If a spare cable is available, remove the suspected cable and install the spare cable. Retest
the TTDS.
• If the TTDS operates properly, then keep the spare cable installed. If the TTDS
is not functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and look for another
problem.
If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC and the sensor.
With the ohm meter set to check for continuality, check each of the wires for
continuity.
• If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.
If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the
cause of the problem.


Operations Manual: Bromma Telescopic Spreader

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations Manual: Bromma Telescopic Spreader

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations Manual: Bromma Telescopic Spreader

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations manual

• READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS

• Bromma Conquip AB or it’s affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted

• If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.

• Refer at all time to the ”Safety precautions” under section 5!

2 • SPREADER DATA SHEET

3 • TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER

4 • TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE

8 • SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE

9 • HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

10 • ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

11 • FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS

BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of

This Operation Manual describes the many features of the

In the event You should need additional information or support, our

BROMMA CONQUIP AB 01 01 ENG

Use only approved slings and shackles.

In the event of a power failure the telescoping motion can be handcranked.

CENTER TWISTLOCKS (EH 170U)

MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET

1. Most frequent load case

2 X 106 lifting cycles

2. Exceptional load cases

a) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in

b) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in

BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 02 ENG

The following safety features are normally included in the crane:

2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is

3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to

5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins

The following safety features are fitted on the spreader:

6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT

1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized

3. DO NOT change system settings and functions.

4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.

5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.

7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is

8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by

9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It

1 of 2 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 01 ENG

11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily.

16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or

17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.

18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden

21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the

2 of 2 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 01 ENG

Because this spreader is equipped with double-coil flipper

If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves

BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 03 ENG.

1 Check spreader and tower for damage.

5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening

6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4).

13 Replace sprocket cover.

15 Place the cable into the top support clamp.

NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage!

17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties.

18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7).

2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage.